US20150219645A1 - Methods for detecting a mycobacterium tuberculosis infection - Google Patents

Methods for detecting a mycobacterium tuberculosis infection Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20150219645A1
US20150219645A1 US14/693,609 US201514693609A US2015219645A1 US 20150219645 A1 US20150219645 A1 US 20150219645A1 US 201514693609 A US201514693609 A US 201514693609A US 2015219645 A1 US2015219645 A1 US 2015219645A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
cells
polypeptide
mycobacterium
seq
mtb
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US14/693,609
Inventor
David M. Lewinsohn
Deborah A. Lewinsohn
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
US Department of Veterans Affairs VA
Original Assignee
Oregon Health Science University
US Department of Veterans Affairs VA
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Oregon Health Science University, US Department of Veterans Affairs VA filed Critical Oregon Health Science University
Priority to US14/693,609 priority Critical patent/US20150219645A1/en
Assigned to THE GOVERNMENT OF THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, DBA THE DEPARTMENT OF VETERANS AFFAIRS reassignment THE GOVERNMENT OF THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, DBA THE DEPARTMENT OF VETERANS AFFAIRS ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: OREGON HEALTH & SCIENCE UNIVERSITY
Assigned to OREGON HEALTH & SCIENCE UNIVERSITY reassignment OREGON HEALTH & SCIENCE UNIVERSITY ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: LEWINSOHN, DAVID, LEWINSOHN, DEBORAH
Publication of US20150219645A1 publication Critical patent/US20150219645A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/53—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor
    • G01N33/569—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor for microorganisms, e.g. protozoa, bacteria, viruses
    • G01N33/56911—Bacteria
    • G01N33/5695—Mycobacteria
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K39/02—Bacterial antigens
    • A61K39/04—Mycobacterium, e.g. Mycobacterium tuberculosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/04—Antibacterial agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/04—Antibacterial agents
    • A61P31/06—Antibacterial agents for tuberculosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
    • A61P37/04—Immunostimulants
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K14/00—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K14/195—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from bacteria
    • C07K14/35—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from bacteria from Mycobacteriaceae (F)
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/5005—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving human or animal cells
    • G01N33/5008—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving human or animal cells for testing or evaluating the effect of chemical or biological compounds, e.g. drugs, cosmetics
    • G01N33/5044—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving human or animal cells for testing or evaluating the effect of chemical or biological compounds, e.g. drugs, cosmetics involving specific cell types
    • G01N33/5047—Cells of the immune system
    • G01N33/505—Cells of the immune system involving T-cells
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/68—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving proteins, peptides or amino acids
    • G01N33/6893—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving proteins, peptides or amino acids related to diseases not provided for elsewhere
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K2039/51—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies comprising whole cells, viruses or DNA/RNA
    • A61K2039/53—DNA (RNA) vaccination
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2333/00—Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature
    • G01N2333/195—Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature from bacteria
    • G01N2333/35—Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature from bacteria from Mycobacteriaceae (F)
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2469/00—Immunoassays for the detection of microorganisms
    • G01N2469/10—Detection of antigens from microorganism in sample from host
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2800/00—Detection or diagnosis of diseases
    • G01N2800/26—Infectious diseases, e.g. generalised sepsis
    • Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02A—TECHNOLOGIES FOR ADAPTATION TO CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02A50/00—TECHNOLOGIES FOR ADAPTATION TO CLIMATE CHANGE in human health protection, e.g. against extreme weather
    • Y02A50/30—Against vector-borne diseases, e.g. mosquito-borne, fly-borne, tick-borne or waterborne diseases whose impact is exacerbated by climate change

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of diagnosis, specifically to methods for detecting a Mycobacterium tuberculsosis (Mtb) infection in a subject.
  • Mcb Mycobacterium tuberculsosis
  • Mycobacteria are a genus of aerobic intracellular bacterial organisms that, upon infection of a host, survive within endosomal compartments of monocytes and macrophages.
  • Human mycobacterial diseases include tuberculosis (caused by M. tuberculosis ), leprosy (caused by M. leprae ), Bairnsdale ulcers (caused by M. ulcerans ), and various infections caused by M. marinum, M. kansasii, M. scrofulaceum, M. szulgai, M. xenopi, M. fortuitum, M. chelonei, M. haemophilum and M. intracellulare (see Wolinsky, E., Chapter 37 in Microbiology: Including Immunology and Molecular Genetics, 3rd Ed., Harper & Row, Philadelphia, 1980).
  • tuberculosis One third of the world's population harbors M. tuberculosis and is at risk for developing tuberculosis (TB). In immunocompromised patients, tuberculosis is increasing at a nearly logarithmic rate, and multidrug resistant strains are appearing. In addition, Mycobacterial strains which were previously considered to be nonpathogenic strains (e.g., M. avium ) have now become major killers of immunosuppressed AIDS patients. Moreover, current Mycobacterial vaccines are either inadequate (such as the BCG vaccine for M. tuberculosis ) or unavailable (such as for M. leprae ) (Kaufmann, S., Microbiol. Sci. 4:324-328, 1987; U.S. Congress, Office of Technology Assessment, The Continuing Challenge of Tuberculosis, pp. 62-67, OTA-H-574, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C., 1993).
  • BCG Bacillus Calmette-Guerin
  • tuberculosis Diagnosis of tuberculosis is commonly achieved using a skin test, which involves intradermal exposure to tuberculin PPD (protein-purified derivative). Antigen-specific T cell responses result in measurable induration at the injection site by 48 to 72 hours after injection, which indicates exposure to Mycobacterial antigens.
  • PPD protein-purified derivative
  • the sensitivity and specificity of this test are not ideal; individuals vaccinated with BCG cannot be distinguished from infected individuals. Accordingly, there is a need in the art for improved diagnostic methods for detecting tuberculosis.
  • Methods for diagnosing an infection with Mycobacterium tuberculosis are disclosed herein.
  • the methods can include detecting CD8 + T cells and/or CD4+ that specifically bind an Mtb polypeptide of interest.
  • the methods can also include detecting a delayed type hypersensitivity reaction in a subject and/or can include detecting specific Mtb polypeptides and polynucleotides.
  • the disclosed assays can be used individually or in combination.
  • the Mycobacterium tuberculosis infection can be a latent or active infection.
  • methods for detecting Mycobacterium tuberculosis in a subject. These methods include contacting a biological sample from the subject comprising T cells, such as CD8 + T cells and/or CD4 + T cells, with one or more Mycobacterium polypeptides, or an antigen presenting cell presenting the one or more Mycobacterium polypeptides.
  • T cells such as CD8 + T cells and/or CD4 + T cells
  • the one or more Mycobacterium polypeptides include an amino acid sequence set forth as (a) one of the amino acid sequences set forth as SEQ ID NO: 1, SEQ ID NO: 2, SEQ ID NO: 3, SEQ ID NO: 4, SEQ ID NO: 5, SEQ ID NO: 6, SEQ ID NO: 7, SEQ ID NO: 8, SEQ ID NO: 9, SEQ ID NO: 10, SEQ ID NO: 11 or SEQ ID NO: 12; or (b) at least nine to twenty consecutive amino acids of at least one of the amino acid sequences set forth as SEQ ID NO: 1, SEQ ID NO: 2, SEQ ID NO: 3, SEQ ID NO: 4, SEQ ID NO: 5, SEQ ID NO: 6, SEQ ID NO: 7, SEQ ID NO: 7, SEQ ID NO: 8, SEQ ID NO: 9, SEQ ID NO: 10, SEQ ID NO: 11 or SEQ ID NO: 12, wherein the nine to twenty consecutive amino acids specifically bind major histocompatibility complex (MHC) class I. It is determined whether the T cells specifically recognize the Mycobacterium polypeptide
  • kits for detecting Mycobacterium tuberculosis in a subject, wherein the methods include administering to the subject an effective amount of a Mycobacterium polypeptide into the skin, subcutaneously or intradermally.
  • the Mycobacterium polypeptide includes an amino acid sequence set forth as (a) one of the amino acid sequences set forth as SEQ ID NO: 1, SEQ ID NO: 2, SEQ ID NO: 3, SEQ ID NO: 4, SEQ ID NO: 5, SEQ ID NO: 6, SEQ ID NO: 7, SEQ ID NO: 8, SEQ ID NO: 9, SEQ ID NO: 10, SEQ ID NO: 11 or SEQ ID NO: 12; or (b) at least nine to twenty consecutive amino acids of at least one of the amino acid sequences set forth as SEQ ID NO: 1, SEQ ID NO: 2, SEQ ID NO: 3, SEQ ID NO: 4, SEQ ID NO: 5, SEQ ID NO: 6, SEQ ID NO: 7, SEQ ID NO: 7, SEQ ID NO: 8, SEQ ID NO: 9, SEQ ID NO: 10,
  • methods for detecting a Mycobacterium tuberculosis infection in a subject, wherein the methods include detecting the presence of a Mycobacterium polypeptide or a polynucleotide encoding the polypeptide in a sample from the subject.
  • the Mycobacterium polypeptide includes an amino acid sequence set forth as one of the amino acid sequences set forth as SEQ ID NO: 1, SEQ ID NO: 2, SEQ ID NO: 3, SEQ ID NO: 4, SEQ ID NO: 5, SEQ ID NO: 6, SEQ ID NO: 7, SEQ ID NO: 8, SEQ ID NO: 9, SEQ ID NO: 10, SEQ ID NO: 11 or SEQ ID NO: 12.
  • FIG. 1 is two graphs showing the determination of human effector cell frequencies ex vivo using the IFN- ⁇ ELISPOT assay.
  • Each responding T cell population was tested in duplicate at four different cell concentrations. To determine the effector cell frequency of antigen-specific T cells, the average number of spots per well for each duplicate was plotted against the number of responder cells per well.
  • Linear regression analysis was used to determine the slope of the line, which represents the frequency of antigen-specific T cells.
  • the assay was considered positive (reflecting the presence of a primed T cell response), if the binomial probability for the number of spots was significantly different by experimental and control assays.
  • FIG. 2 is a set of graphs showing ex vivo CD8 + T cell frequencies to Mtb antigens are associated with Mtb infection.
  • autologous DC either infected with Mtb or pulsed with cognate peptide pools were incubated with CD8 + T cells in an IFN- ⁇ ELISPOT assay.
  • FIG. 3A-3D are a set of digital images showing the definition of Antigenic Specificity and HLA-Restriction (the characterization of T cell clone D466 D6).
  • D466 D6 T-cells (5000 cells/well) were incubated with autologous LCL (20,000/well) and 5 ⁇ g/ml of antigen. IFN- ⁇ was assessed by ELISPOT after eighteen hours of co-culture.
  • antigens consisted of peptide pools representing known CD4 + antigens, made up of 15 amino acid (aa) peptides overlapping by 11 aa.
  • antigens consisted of individual 15 aa CFP10 peptides that together constitute the peptide pool.
  • antigens consisted of individual nested CFP10 1-15 peptides (10 aa, 9 aa or 8 aa), used to further map the epitope.
  • the restricting allele was identified using LCL (20,000/well) expressing HLA alleles matching D466 at one or two alleles, pulsed with CFP10 2-10 (5 ⁇ g/ml) as APC. After 2 hours, cells were washed and incubated with T-cells (500 cells/well) in an IFN- ⁇ ELISPOT assay.
  • FIG. 4 is a line graph showing the confirmation of minimal epitope mapping of D466 D6.
  • autologous LCL 20,000/well
  • T-cells 1000 cells/well
  • IFN- ⁇ was assessed by ELISPOT after eighteen hours co-culture. Each point represents the mean of duplicate determinations.
  • FIG. 5 is a set of bar graphs showing the profiling of immunodominance pattern for CFP10.
  • autologous DC 20,000/well
  • PP 15-mer peptide
  • ME minimal epitope
  • FIG. 6A-6B is a set of graphs summarizing the minimal epitope mapping data.
  • autologous LCL 20,000/well
  • T-cells 1000 cells/well
  • IFN- ⁇ was assessed by ELISPOT after eighteen hours co-culture. Each point represents the mean of duplicate determinations.
  • FIG. 7 is a line graph showing the mapping of Minimal Epitope for D504 Clones.
  • autologous LCL 20,000/well
  • T-cell clones 1,000 cells/well
  • IFN- ⁇ was assessed by ELISPOT after eighteen hours co-culture. Each point represents the mean of duplicate determinations.
  • nucleic and amino acid sequences listed in the accompanying sequence listing are shown using standard letter abbreviations for nucleotide bases, and three letter code for amino acids, as defined in 37 C.F.R. 1.822. Only one strand of each nucleic acid sequence is shown, but the complementary strand is understood as included by any reference to the displayed strand.
  • SEQ ID Nos: 1-12 are the amino acid sequence of Mtb polypeptides.
  • SEQ ID NOs: 13-14 are amino acids of Mtb peptides.
  • SEQ ID NOs: 15-25 are the nucleic acid sequences of polynucleotides encoding the Mtb polypeptides.
  • SEQ ID Nos: 26-38 are the amino acid sequences of specific Mtb epitopes.
  • Methods for detecting an infection with Mycobacterium tuberculosis in a subject include detecting the presence of T cells, such as but not limited to CD8+ T cells, that specifically recognize a Mycobacterium tuberculosis (Mtb) polypeptide.
  • T cells such as but not limited to CD8+ T cells, that specifically recognize a Mycobacterium tuberculosis (Mtb) polypeptide.
  • the methods include in vitro assays for detecting the presence of CD8 + T cells in a biological sample, and in vivo assays that detect a delayed type hypersensitivity reaction.
  • the methods can also include detecting Mtb polypeptides and polynucleotides. Reagents for the detection of an Mtb infection are also disclosed.
  • Adjuvant A vehicle used to enhance antigenicity.
  • Adjuvants include a suspension of minerals (alum, aluminum hydroxide, or phosphate) on which antigen is adsorbed; or water-in-oil emulsion in which antigen solution is emulsified in mineral oil (Freund incomplete adjuvant), sometimes with the inclusion of killed mycobacteria (Freund's complete adjuvant) to further enhance antigenicity (inhibits degradation of antigen and/or causes influx of macrophages)
  • Immunostimulatory oligonucleotides (such as those including a CpG motif) can also be used as adjuvants (for example see U.S. Pat. No. 6,194,388; U.S. Pat. No.
  • Adjuvants include biological molecules (a “biological adjuvant”), such as costimulatory molecules.
  • biological adjuvants include IL-2, RANTES, GM-CSF, TNF- ⁇ , IFN- ⁇ , G-CSF, LFA-3, CD72, B7-1, B7-2, OX-40L and 41 BBL
  • Amplification Of a nucleic acid molecule (e.g., a DNA or RNA molecule) refers to use of a technique that increases the number of copies of a nucleic acid molecule in a specimen.
  • An example of amplification is the polymerase chain reaction, in which a biological sample collected from a subject is contacted with a pair of oligonucleotide primers, under conditions that allow for the hybridization of the primers to a nucleic acid template in the sample.
  • the primers are extended under suitable conditions, dissociated from the template, and then re-annealed, extended, and dissociated to amplify the number of copies of the nucleic acid.
  • the product of amplification can be characterized by electrophoresis, restriction endonuclease cleavage patterns, oligonucleotide hybridization or ligation, and/or nucleic acid sequencing using standard techniques.
  • Other examples of amplification include strand displacement amplification, as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,744,311; transcription-free isothermal amplification, as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,033,881; repair chain reaction amplification, as disclosed in WO 90/01069; ligase chain reaction amplification, as disclosed in EP-A-320 308; gap filling ligase chain reaction amplification, as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,427,930; and NASBATM RNA transcription-free amplification, as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,025,134.
  • Antigen A compound, composition, or substance that can stimulate the production of antibodies or a T cell response in an animal, including compositions that are injected or absorbed into an animal.
  • An antigen reacts with the products of specific humoral or cellular immunity, including those induced by heterologous immunogens.
  • the term “antigen” includes all related antigenic epitopes. “Epitope” or “antigenic determinant” refers to a site on an antigen to which B and/or T cells respond. In one embodiment, T cells respond to the epitope, when the epitope is presented in conjunction with an MHC molecule. Epitopes can be formed both from contiguous amino acids or noncontiguous amino acids juxtaposed by tertiary folding of a protein.
  • Epitopes formed from contiguous amino acids are typically retained on exposure to denaturing solvents whereas epitopes formed by tertiary folding are typically lost on treatment with denaturing solvents.
  • An epitope typically includes at least 3, and more usually, at least 5, about 9, or about 8-10 amino acids in a unique spatial conformation. Methods of determining spatial conformation of epitopes include, for example, x-ray crystallography and 2-dimensional nuclear magnetic resonance.
  • An antigen can be a tissue-specific antigen, or a disease-specific antigen. These terms are not exclusive, as a tissue-specific antigen can also be a disease specific antigen.
  • a tissue-specific antigen is expressed in a limited number of tissues, such as a single tissue.
  • a tissue specific antigen may be expressed by more than one tissue, such as, but not limited to, an antigen that is expressed in more than one reproductive tissue, such as in both prostate and uterine tissue.
  • a disease-specific antigen is expressed coincidentally with a disease process. Specific non-limiting examples of a disease-specific antigen are an antigen whose expression correlates with, or is predictive of, tuberculosis.
  • a disease-specific antigen can be an antigen recognized by T cells or B cells.
  • Immunoglobulin molecules and immunologically active portions of immunoglobulin molecules i.e., molecules that contain an antigen binding site that specifically binds (immunoreacts with) an antigen, such as an Mtb polypeptide.
  • a naturally occurring antibody e.g., IgG, IgM, IgD
  • IgG, IgM, IgD includes four polypeptide chains, two heavy (H) chains and two light (L) chains interconnected by disulfide bonds.
  • H heavy
  • L light
  • the antigen-binding function of an antibody can be performed by fragments of a naturally occurring antibody.
  • binding fragments encompassed within the term antibody include (i) a Fab fragment consisting of the VL, VH, CL and C H1 domains; (ii) an Fa fragment consisting of the V H and C H1 domains; (iii) an Fv fragment consisting of the V L and V H domains of a single arm of an antibody, (iv) a dAb fragment (Ward et al., Nature 341:544-546, 1989) which consists of a V H domain; (v) an isolated complementarity determining region (CDR); and (vi) a F(ab′) 2 fragment, a bivalent fragment comprising two Fab fragments linked by a disulfide bridge at the hinge region.
  • Immunoglobulins and certain variants thereof are known and many have been prepared in recombinant cell culture (e.g., see U.S. Pat. No. 4,745,055; U.S. Pat. No. 4,444,487; WO 88/03565; EP 256,654; EP 120,694; EP 125,023; Faoulkner et al., Nature 298:286, 1982; Morrison, J. Immunol. 123:793, 1979; Morrison et al., Ann Rev. Immunol 2:239, 1984).
  • Animal Living multi-cellular vertebrate organisms, a category that includes, for example, mammals and birds.
  • mammal includes both human and non-human mammals.
  • subject includes both human and veterinary subjects.
  • Antibody Immunoglobulin molecules and immunologically active portions of immunoglobulin molecules, i.e., molecules that contain an antigen binding site that specifically binds (immunoreacts with) an antigen.
  • a naturally occurring antibody e.g., IgG, IgM, IgD
  • IgG, IgM, IgD includes four polypeptide chains, two heavy (H) chains and two light (L) chains interconnected by disulfide bonds.
  • H heavy
  • L light
  • the antigen-binding function of an antibody can be performed by fragments of a naturally occurring antibody.
  • binding fragments encompassed within the term antibody include (i) a Fab fragment consisting of the V L , V H , C L and C H1 domains; (ii) an F d fragment consisting of the V H and C H1 domains; (iii) an Fv fragment consisting of the VL and VH domains of a single arm of an antibody, (iv) a dAb fragment (Ward et al., Nature 341:544-546, 1989) which consists of a V H domain; (v) an isolated complimentarity determining region (CDR); and (vi) a F(ab′) 2 fragment, a bivalent fragment comprising two Fab fragments linked by a disulfide bridge at the hinge region.
  • Immunoglobulins and certain variants thereof are known and many have been prepared in recombinant cell culture (e.g., see U.S. Pat. No. 4,745,055; U.S. Pat. No. 4,444,487; WO 88/03565; EP 256,654; EP 120,694; EP 125,023; Faoulkner et al., Nature 298:286, 1982; Morrison, J. Immunol. 123:793, 1979; Morrison et al., Ann Rev. Immunol 2:239, 1984).
  • Antigen presenting cell A cell that can present an antigen to T cell, such that the T cells are activated.
  • Dendritic cells are the principle antigen presenting cells (APCs) involved in primary immune responses. Their major function is to obtain antigen in tissues, migrate to lymphoid organs and present the antigen in order to activate T cells.
  • dendritic cells are signaled to undergo rapid morphological and physiological changes that facilitate the initiation and development of immune responses.
  • these are the up-regulation of molecules involved in antigen presentation; production of pro-inflammatory cytokines, including IL-12, key to the generation of Th1 responses; and secretion of chemokines that help to drive differentiation, expansion, and migration of surrounding naive Th cells.
  • these up-regulated molecules facilitate the ability of dendritic cells to coordinate the activation and effector function of other surrounding lymphocytes that ultimately provide protection for the host.
  • cDNA complementary DNA: A piece of DNA lacking internal, non-coding segments (introns) and regulatory sequences that determine transcription. cDNA is synthesized in the laboratory by reverse transcription from messenger RNA extracted from cells.
  • CD4 Cluster of differentiation factor 4, a T cell surface protein that mediates interaction with the MHC Class II molecule. CD4 also serves as the primary receptor site for HIV on T cells during HIV infection. Cells that express CD4 are often helper T cells.
  • CD8 Cluster of differentiation factor 8, a T cell surface protein that mediates interaction with the MHC Class I molecule. Cells that express CD8 are often cytotoxic T cells. “CD8+ T cell mediated immunity” is an immune response implemented by presentation of antigens to CD8+ T cells.
  • cDNA complementary DNA: A piece of DNA lacking internal, non-coding segments (introns) and regulatory sequences that determine transcription. cDNA is synthesized in the laboratory by reverse transcription from messenger RNA extracted from cells.
  • Constant amino acid substitutions are those substitutions that do not substantially affect or decrease an activity or antigenicity of the Mycobacterium polypeptide. Specific, non-limiting examples of a conservative substitution include the following examples:
  • conservative variation also includes the use of a substituted amino acid in place of an unsubstituted parent amino acid, provided that antibodies raised to the substituted polypeptide also immunoreact with the unsubstituted polypeptide, or that an immune response can be generated against the substituted polypeptide that is similar to the immune response against and unsubstituted polypeptide, such a Mycobacterium antigen.
  • non-conservative substitutions are those that reduce an activity or antigenicity.
  • a polypeptide that consists essentially of a specified amino acid sequence if it does not include any additional amino acid residues.
  • the polypeptide can include additional non-peptide components, such as labels (for example, fluorescent, radioactive, or solid particle labels), sugars or lipids.
  • additional non-peptide components such as lipids, sugars or labels.
  • Contacting The process of incubating one agent in the presence of another.
  • the cell is incubated with the agent for a sufficient period of time for the agent and the cell to interact.
  • Costimulatory molecule Although engagement of the TCR with peptide-MHC delivers one signal to the T cell, this signal alone can be insufficient to activate the T cell. Costimulatory molecules are molecules that, when bound to their ligand, deliver a second signal required for the T cell to become activated.
  • the most well-known costimulatory molecule on the T cell is CD28, which binds to either B7-1 (also called CD80) or B7-2 (also known as CD86).
  • An additional costimulatory molecule is B7-3.
  • Accessory molecules that also provide a second signal for the activation of T cells include intracellular adhesion molecule (ICAM-1 and ICAM-2), leukocyte function associated antigen (LFA-1, LFA-2 and LFA-3). Integrins and tumor necrosis factor (TNF) superfamily members can also serve as co-stimulatory molecules.
  • ICAM-1 and ICAM-2 intracellular adhesion molecule
  • LFA-1, LFA-2 and LFA-3 leukocyte function associated antigen
  • Cytokine Proteins made by cells that affect the behavior of other cells, such as lymphocytes.
  • a cytokine is a chemokine, a molecule that affects cellular trafficking.
  • cytokines include the interleukins (IL-2, IL-4, IL-6, IL-10, IL-21, etc.), and interferon (IFN)- ⁇ .
  • Degenerate variant A polynucleotide encoding an epitope of an Mtb polypeptide that includes a sequence that is degenerate as a result of the genetic code. There are 20 natural amino acids, most of which are specified by more than one codon. Therefore, all degenerate nucleotide sequences are included in this disclosure as long as the amino acid sequence of the Mtb polypeptide encoded by the nucleotide sequence is unchanged.
  • Dendritic cell are the principle antigen presenting cells (APCs) involved in primary immune responses. Dendritic cells include plasmacytoid dendritic cells and myeloid dendritic cells. Their major function is to obtain antigen in tissues, migrate to lymphoid organs and present the antigen in order to activate T cells Immature dendritic cells originate in the bone marrow and reside in the periphery as immature cells.
  • Diagnostic Identifying the presence or nature of a pathologic condition, such as, but not limited to, tuberculosis. Diagnostic methods differ in their sensitivity and specificity.
  • the “sensitivity” of a diagnostic assay is the percentage of diseased individuals who test positive (percent of true positives).
  • the “specificity” of a diagnostic assay is 1 minus the false positive rate, where the false positive rate is defined as the proportion of those without the disease who test positive. While a particular diagnostic method may not provide a definitive diagnosis of a condition, it suffices if the method provides a positive indication that aids in diagnosis.
  • “Prognostic” means predicting the probability of development (for example, severity) of a pathologic condition, such as tuberculosis.
  • Displaying The process of localizing a peptide:antigen complex, or a peptide, on the outer surface of a cell where the peptide:antigen complex or peptide is accessible to a second cell, molecules displayed by a second cell, or soluble factors.
  • a peptide, or a peptide:antigen complex is “displayed” by a cell when it is present on the outer surface of the cell and is accessible to a second cell, to molecules displayed by the second cell, or to soluble factors.
  • Epitope An antigenic determinant. These are particular chemical groups or peptide sequences on a molecule that are antigenic, i.e. that elicit a specific immune response. An antibody specifically binds a particular antigenic epitope on a polypeptide, such a Mycobacterium polypeptide.
  • Expression Control Sequences Nucleic acid sequences that regulate the expression of a heterologous nucleic acid sequence to which it is operatively linked. Expression control sequences are operatively linked to a nucleic acid sequence when the expression control sequences control and regulate the transcription and, as appropriate, translation of the nucleic acid sequence.
  • expression control sequences can include appropriate promoters, enhancers, transcription terminators, a start codon (i.e., ATG) in front of a protein-encoding gene, splicing signal for introns, maintenance of the correct reading frame of that gene to permit proper translation of mRNA, and stop codons.
  • control sequences is intended to include, at a minimum, components whose presence can influence expression, and can also include additional components whose presence is advantageous, for example, leader sequences and fusion partner sequences. Expression control sequences can include a promoter.
  • a promoter is a minimal sequence sufficient to direct transcription. Also included are those promoter elements which are sufficient to render promoter-dependent gene expression controllable for cell-type specific, tissue-specific, or inducible by external signals or agents; such elements may be located in the 5′ or 3′ regions of the gene. Both constitutive and inducible promoters, are included (see e.g., Bitter et al., Methods in Enzymology 153:516-544, 1987). For example, when cloning in bacterial systems, inducible promoters such as pL of bacteriophage lambda , plac, ptrp, ptac (ptrp-lac hybrid promoter) and the like may be used.
  • promoters derived from the genome of mammalian cells (e.g., metallothionein promoter) or from mammalian viruses (e.g., the retrovirus long terminal repeat; the adenovirus late promoter; the vaccinia virus 7.5K promoter) can be used. Promoters produced by recombinant DNA or synthetic techniques may also be used to provide for transcription of the nucleic acid sequences. In one embodiment, the promoter is a cytomegalovirus promoter.
  • Fractionating Subjecting a sample to conditions or procedures which separate the components of the sample based on physical or chemical properties such as, but not limited to, size, charge, solubility, or composition.
  • Example of fractionation procedures include, but are not limited to, selective precipitation, organic extraction, size exclusion dialysis or chromatography, such as ion exchange chromatography.
  • a fraction is a soluble extract or an organic extract of an organism, such as a Mycobacterium.
  • Sequence alterations such as in an epitope of an antigen, that yield the same results as described herein.
  • sequence alterations can include, but are not limited to, conservative substitutions, deletions, mutations, frameshifts, and insertions.
  • Heterologous Originating from separate genetic sources or species.
  • a polypeptide that is heterologous to an Mtb polypeptide originates from a nucleic acid that does not encode the Mtb polypeptide.
  • a polypeptide comprising nine consecutive amino acids from an Mtb polypeptide, or at most 20 consecutive amino acids from the Mtb polypeptide, and a heterologous amino acid sequence includes a ⁇ -galactosidase, a maltose binding protein, and albumin, hepatitis B surface antigen, or an immunoglobulin amino acid sequence.
  • an antibody that specifically binds to a protein of interest will not specifically bind to a heterologous protein.
  • Host cells Cells in which a vector can be propagated and its DNA expressed.
  • the cell may be prokaryotic or eukaryotic.
  • the cell can be mammalian, such as a human cell.
  • the term also includes any progeny of the subject host cell. It is understood that all progeny may not be identical to the parental cell since there may be mutations that occur during replication. However, such progeny are included when the term “host cell” is used.
  • HLA Human Leukocyte Antigen
  • MHC human major histocompatibility complex
  • Individual loci are designated by uppercase letters, as in HLA-E, and alleles are designated by numbers, as in HLA-A*0201.
  • the three main MHC class I genes are called HLA-A, HLA-B, and HLA-C.
  • genes that encode 32 microglobulin-associated cell surface molecules that are linked to the MHC class I genes. The expression of these genes is variable, both in the tissue distribution and the amount expressed on cells; these genes have been termed the MHC class IB genes.
  • Immune response A response of a cell of the immune system, such as a B cell, natural killer cell, or a T cell, to a stimulus.
  • the response is specific for a particular antigen (an “antigen-specific response”).
  • an immune response is a T cell response, such as a Th1, Th2, or Th3 response.
  • an immune response is a response of a suppressor T cell.
  • Immunogenic peptide A peptide which comprises an allele-specific motif or other sequence such that the peptide will bind an MHC molecule and induce a T cell response, such as a CD8 + T cell response, or a B cell response (such as antibody production) against the antigen from which the immunogenic peptide is derived.
  • immunogenic peptides are identified using sequence motifs or other methods, such as neural net or polynomial determinations, known in the art.
  • algorithms are used to determine the “binding threshold” of peptides to select those with scores that give them a high probability of binding at a certain affinity and will be immunogenic.
  • the algorithms are based either on the effects on MHC binding of a particular amino acid at a particular position, the effects on antibody binding of a particular amino acid at a particular position, or the effects on binding of a particular substitution in a motif-containing peptide.
  • a “conserved residue” is one which appears in a significantly higher frequency than would be expected by random distribution at a particular position in a peptide.
  • a conserved residue is one where the MHC structure may provide a contact point with the immunogenic peptide.
  • Immunogenic peptides can also be identified by measuring their binding to a specific MHC protein and by their ability to stimulate CD4 and/or CD8 when presented in the context of the MHC protein.
  • an immunogenic “Mtb peptide” is a series of contiguous amino acid residues from the Mtb protein generally between 9 and 20 amino acids in length, such as about 8 to 11 residues in length.
  • Specific immunogenic polypeptides are disclosed herein that are 9 or 10 amino acid residues in length, or at most 12 amino acids in length.
  • immunogenic Mtb polypeptides can be used to induce an immune response in a subject, such as a B cell response or a T cell response.
  • an immunogenic Mtb polypeptide when bound to a Major Histocompatibility Complex Class I molecule, activates CD8 + T cells, such as cytotoxic T lymphocytes (CTLs) against Mtb.
  • CTLs cytotoxic T lymphocytes
  • an immunogenic peptide includes an allele-specific motif or other sequence such that the peptide will bind an MHC molecule and induce a CD8 + response against the antigen from which the immunogenic peptide is derived.
  • a CD8 + T cell that specifically recognizes an Mtb polypeptide is activated, proliferates, and/or secretes cytokines in response to that specific polypeptide, and not to other, non-related polypeptides.
  • Immunogenic composition A composition comprising an immunogenic Mtb polypeptide or a nucleic acid encoding the immunogenic Mtb polypeptide that induces a measurable T response against Mtb, such as a CD8 + T cell response, or induces a measurable B cell response (such as production of antibodies that specifically bind an Mtb polypeptide).
  • the immunogenic composition can consist of the isolated nucleic acid, vector including the nucleic acid/or immunogenic peptide.
  • the immunogenic composition will typically comprise the nucleic acid, vector including the nucleic acid, and or immunogenic polypeptide, in pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, and/or other agents.
  • An immunogenic composition can optionally include an adjuvant, a costimulatory molecule, or a nucleic acid encoding a costimulatory molecule.
  • An Mtb polypeptide, or nucleic acid encoding the polypeptide can be readily tested for its ability to induce a CD8+ T cell response.
  • Inhibiting or treating a disease refers to inhibiting the full development of a disease. In several examples, inhibiting a disease refers to lessening symptoms of a tuberculosis. “Treatment” refers to a therapeutic intervention that ameliorates a sign or symptom of a disease or pathological condition related to the disease, such as tuberculosis.
  • IFN- ⁇ Interferon gamma
  • ⁇ Interferon gamma
  • IFN- ⁇ is a dimeric protein with subunits of 146 amino acids. The protein is glycosylated at two sites, and the pI is 8.3-8.5. IFN- ⁇ is synthesized as a precursor protein of 166 amino acids including a secretory signal sequence of 23 amino acids. Two molecular forms of the biologically active protein of 20 and 25 kDa have been described. Both of them are glycosylated at position 25. The 25 kDa form is also glycosylated at position 97. The observed differences of natural IFN- ⁇ with respect to molecular mass and charge are due to variable glycosylation patterns. 40-60 kDa forms observed under non-denaturing conditions are dimers and tetramers of IFN- ⁇ . The human gene has a length of approximately 6 kb. It contains four exons and maps to chromosome 12q24.1.
  • IFN- ⁇ can be detected by sensitive immunoassays, such as an ELSA test that allows detection of individual cells producing IFN- ⁇ . Minute amounts of IFN- ⁇ can be detected indirectly by measuring IFN-induced proteins such as Mx protein. The induction of the synthesis of IP-10 has been used also to measure IFN- ⁇ concentrations.
  • bioassays can be used to detect IFN- ⁇ , such as an assay that employs induction of indoleamine 2,3-dioxygenase activity in 2D9 cells. The production of IFN- ⁇ can be used to assess T cell activation, such as activation of a T cell by an HLA-E presented Mycobacterium antigen.
  • Isolated An “isolated” nucleic acid has been substantially separated or purified away from other nucleic acid sequences in the cell of the organism in which the nucleic acid naturally occurs, i.e., other chromosomal and extrachromosomal DNA and RNA.
  • isolated thus encompasses nucleic acids purified by standard nucleic acid purification methods.
  • the term also embraces nucleic acids prepared by recombinant expression in a host cell as well as chemically synthesized nucleic acids.
  • Label A detectable compound or composition that is conjugated directly or indirectly to another molecule to facilitate detection of that molecule.
  • Specific, non-limiting examples of labels include fluorescent tags, enzymatic linkages, and radioactive isotopes.
  • Linker sequence is an amino acid sequence that covalently links two polypeptide domains.
  • Linker sequences can be included in the between the Mtb epitopes disclosed herein to provide rotational freedom to the linked polypeptide domains and thereby to promote proper domain folding and presentation to the MHC.
  • linker sequences can be provided between them, such as a polypeptide comprising Mtb polypeptide-linker-Mtb polypeptide.
  • Linker sequences which are generally between 2 and 25 amino acids in length, are well known in the art and include, but are not limited to, the glycine(4)-serine spacer (GGGGS x3) described by Chaudhary et al., Nature 339:394-397, 1989.
  • Lymphocytes A type of white blood cell that is involved in the immune defenses of the body. There are two main types of lymphocytes: B cells and T cells.
  • Mammal This term includes both human and non-human mammals. Similarly, the term “patient” or “subject” includes both human and veterinary subjects.
  • Mycobacteria A genus of aerobic intracellular bacterial organisms. Upon invasion of a host, these organisms survive within endosomal compartments of monocytes and macrophages.
  • Human mycobacterial diseases include tuberculosis (cause by M. tuberculosis ), Leprosy (caused by M. leprae ), Bairnsdale ulcers (caused by M. ulcerans ), and other infections that can be caused by M. marinum, M. kansasii, M. scrofulaceum, M. szulgai, M. xenopi, M. fortuitum, M. haemophilum, M. chelonei, and M. intracelluare.
  • Mycobacterium strains that were previously considered to be nonpathogenic (such as M. avium ) are also now known to be major killers of immunosuppressed AIDS patients.
  • the major response to mycobacteria involves cell mediated hypersensitivity (DTH) reactions with T cells and macrophages playing major roles in the intracellular killing and walling off (or containing) of the organism (granuloma formation).
  • DTH cell mediated hypersensitivity
  • a major T cell response involves CD4+ lymphocytes that recognize myocbacterial heat shock proteins and immunodominant antigens.
  • a first nucleic acid sequence is operably linked with a second nucleic acid sequence when the first nucleic acid sequence is placed in a functional relationship with the second nucleic acid sequence.
  • a promoter is operably linked to a coding sequence if the promoter effects the transcription or expression of the coding sequence.
  • operably linked DNA sequences are contiguous and, where necessary to join two protein coding regions, the open reading frames are aligned.
  • ORF open reading frame: A series of nucleotide triplets (codons) coding for amino acids without any termination codons. These sequences are usually translatable into a polypeptide.
  • Mycobacterium polypeptides include synthetic embodiments of peptides described herein.
  • analogues non-peptide organic molecules
  • derivatives chemically functionalized peptide molecules obtained starting with the disclosed peptide sequences
  • variants homologs
  • Each polypeptide of the invention is comprised of a sequence of amino acids, which may be either L- and/or D-amino acids, naturally occurring and otherwise.
  • Peptides may be modified by a variety of chemical techniques to produce derivatives having essentially the same activity as the unmodified peptides, and optionally having other desirable properties.
  • carboxylic acid groups of the protein may be provided in the form of a salt of a pharmaceutically-acceptable cation or esterified to form a C 1 -C 16 ester, or converted to an amide of formula NR 1 R 2 wherein R 1 and R 2 are each independently H or C 1 -C 16 alkyl, or combined to form a heterocyclic ring, such as a 5- or 6-membered ring.
  • Amino groups of the peptide may be in the form of a pharmaceutically-acceptable acid addition salt, such as the HCl, HBr, acetic, benzoic, toluene sulfonic, maleic, tartaric and other organic salts, or may be modified to C 1 -C 16 alkyl or dialkyl amino or further converted to an amide.
  • a pharmaceutically-acceptable acid addition salt such as the HCl, HBr, acetic, benzoic, toluene sulfonic, maleic, tartaric and other organic salts
  • Hydroxyl groups of the peptide side chains may be converted to C 1 -C 16 alkoxy or to a C 1 -C 16 ester using well-recognized techniques.
  • Phenyl and phenolic rings of the peptide side chains may be substituted with one or more halogen atoms, such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine, or with C 1 -C 16 alkyl, C 1 -C 16 alkoxy, carboxylic acids and esters thereof, or amides of such carboxylic acids.
  • Methylene groups of the peptide side chains can be extended to homologous C 2 -C 4 alkylenes.
  • Thiols can be protected with any one of a number of well-recognized protecting groups, such as acetamide groups.
  • protecting groups such as acetamide groups.
  • Peptidomimetic and organomimetic embodiments are envisioned, whereby the three-dimensional arrangement of the chemical constituents of such peptido- and organomimetics mimic the three-dimensional arrangement of the peptide backbone and component amino acid side chains, resulting in such peptido- and organomimetics of a Mycobacterium polypeptide having measurable or enhanced ability to generate an immune response.
  • a pharmacophore is an idealized, three-dimensional definition of the structural requirements for biological activity.
  • Peptido- and organomimetics can be designed to fit each pharmacophore with current computer modeling software (using computer assisted drug design or CADD).
  • Pharmaceutical agent or drug A chemical compound or composition capable of inducing a desired therapeutic or prophylactic effect when properly administered to a subject.
  • compositions and formulations suitable for pharmaceutical delivery of the fusion proteins herein disclosed are conventional. Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, by E. W. Martin, Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa., 15th Edition (1975), describes compositions and formulations suitable for pharmaceutical delivery of the fusion proteins herein disclosed.
  • parenteral formulations usually comprise injectable fluids that include pharmaceutically and physiologically acceptable fluids such as water, physiological saline, balanced salt solutions, aqueous dextrose, glycerol or the like as a vehicle.
  • pharmaceutically and physiologically acceptable fluids such as water, physiological saline, balanced salt solutions, aqueous dextrose, glycerol or the like as a vehicle.
  • physiologically acceptable fluids such as water, physiological saline, balanced salt solutions, aqueous dextrose, glycerol or the like
  • solid compositions e.g., powder, pill, tablet, or capsule forms
  • conventional non-toxic solid carriers can include, for example, pharmaceutical grades of mannitol, lactose, starch, or magnesium stearate.
  • compositions to be administered can contain minor amounts of non-toxic auxiliary substances, such as wetting or emulsifying agents, preservatives, and pH buffering agents and the like, for example sodium acetate or sorbitan monolaurate.
  • non-toxic auxiliary substances such as wetting or emulsifying agents, preservatives, and pH buffering agents and the like, for example sodium acetate or sorbitan monolaurate.
  • Polynucleotide A linear nucleotide sequence, including sequences of greater than 100 nucleotide bases in length.
  • Polypeptide Any chain of amino acids, regardless of length or post-translational modification (e.g., glycosylation or phosphorylation).
  • a “peptide” is a chain of amino acids that is less than 100 amino acids in length.
  • a “peptide” is a portion of a polypeptide, such as at about 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, or 100 contiguous amino acids of a polypeptide that is greater than 100 amino acids in length.
  • Portion of a nucleic acid sequence At least 10, 20, 30 or 40 contiguous nucleotides of the relevant sequence, such as a sequence encoding an antigen. In some instances it would be advantageous to use a portion consisting of 50 or more nucleotides. For instance, when describing a portion of an antigen (such as an antigenic epitope), it may be advantageous to remove a portion of the relevant sequence comprising at least 10, 20, 30, 40 or 50 nucleotides up to a length.
  • Nucleic acid probes and primers may readily be prepared based on the nucleic acids provided by this invention.
  • a probe comprises an isolated nucleic acid attached to a detectable label or reporter molecule.
  • Typical labels include radioactive isotopes, ligands, chemiluminescent agents, and enzymes. Methods for labeling and guidance in the choice of labels appropriate for various purposes are discussed, e.g., in Sambrook et al. (1989) and Ausubel et al. (1987).
  • Primers are short nucleic acids, preferably DNA oligonucleotides 15 nucleotides or more in length. Primers may be annealed to a complementary target DNA strand by nucleic acid hybridization to form a hybrid between the primer and the target DNA strand, and then extended along the target DNA strand by a DNA polymerase enzyme. Primer pairs can be used for amplification of a nucleic acid sequence, e.g., by the polymerase chain reaction (PCR) or other nucleic-acid amplification methods known in the art.
  • PCR polymerase chain reaction
  • PCR primer pairs can be derived from a known sequence, for example, by using computer programs intended for that purpose such as Primer (Version 0.5, ⁇ 1991, Whitehead Institute for Biomedical Research, Cambridge, Mass.).
  • Preventing or treating a disease refers to inhibiting the full development of a disease, for example in a person who is known to be at risk of infection with M. tuberculosis, or M. leprae.
  • An example of a person with a known predisposition is someone living with a person diagnosed with tuberculosis, health care professionals, or someone the family, or who has been exposed to M. tuberculosis.
  • Treatment refers to a therapeutic intervention that ameliorates a sign or symptom of a disease or pathological condition, such as tuberculosis, after it has begun to develop.
  • a promoter is an array of nucleic acid control sequences which direct transcription of a nucleic acid.
  • a promoter includes necessary nucleic acid sequences near the start site of transcription, such as, in the case of a polymerase II type promoter, a TATA element.
  • a promoter also optionally includes distal enhancer or repressor elements which can be located as much as several thousand base pairs from the start site of transcription.
  • the promoter can be a constitutive or an inducible promoter.
  • a specific, non-limiting example of a promoter is the HCMV IE promoter.
  • purified does not require absolute purity; rather, it is intended as a relative term.
  • a purified antigen preparation is one in which the antigen is more pure than the protein in its originating environment within a cell.
  • a preparation of an antigen is typically purified such that the antigen represents at least 50% of the total protein content of the preparation.
  • more highly purified preparations may be required for certain applications. For example, for such applications, preparations in which the antigen comprises at least 75% or at least 90% of the total protein content may be employed.
  • a recombinant nucleic acid or polypeptide is one that has a sequence that is not naturally occurring or has a sequence that is made by an artificial combination of two or more otherwise separated segments of sequence. This artificial combination is often accomplished by chemical synthesis or, more commonly, by the artificial manipulation of isolated segments of nucleic acids, e.g., by genetic engineering techniques.
  • Sequence identity The similarity between amino acid sequences is expressed in terms of the similarity between the sequences, otherwise referred to as sequence identity. Sequence identity is frequently measured in terms of percentage identity (or similarity or homology); the higher the percentage, the more similar the two sequences are. Variants of antigen polypeptides will possess a relatively high degree of sequence identity when aligned using standard methods.
  • NCBI Basic Local Alignment Search Tool (Altschul et al., 1990) is available from several sources, including the National Center for Biotechnology Information (NCBI, Bethesda, Md.) and on the NCBI Basic Local Alignment Search Tool (BLAST) (Altschul et al., 1990) is available from several sources, including the National Center for Biotechnology Information (NCBI, Bethesda, Md.) and on the NCBI Basic Local Alignment Search Tool (BLAST) (Altschul et al., 1990) is available from several sources, including the National Center for Biotechnology Information (NCBI, Bethesda, Md.) and on the NCBI Basic Local Alignment Search Tool (BLAST) (Altschul et al., 1990) is available from several sources, including the National Center for Biotechnology Information (NCBI, Bethesda, Md.) and on the NCBI Basic Local Alignment Search Tool (BLAST) (Altschul et al., 1990) is available from several
  • Variants of antigenic polypeptides are typically characterized by possession of at least 50% sequence identity counted over the full length alignment with the amino acid sequence of a native antigen sequence using the NCBI Blast 2.0, gapped blastp set to default parameters. Proteins with even greater similarity to the reference sequences will show increasing percentage identities when assessed by this method, such as at least 60%, at least 65%, at least 70%, at least 75%, at least 80%, at least 90% or at least 95% sequence identity. When less than the entire sequence is being compared for sequence identity, variants will typically possess at least 75% sequence identity over short windows of 10-20 amino acids, and may possess sequence identities of at least 85% or at least 90% or 95% depending on their similarity to the reference sequence.
  • variants of MHC domain polypeptides also retain the biological activity of the native polypeptide. For the purposes of this invention, that activity is conveniently assessed by incorporating the variant domain in the appropriate ⁇ 1 ⁇ 1 or ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2 polypeptide and determining the ability of the resulting polypeptide to inhibit antigen specific T-cell proliferation in vitro, or to induce T suppressor cells or the expression of IL-10 as described in detail below.
  • Therapeutically active polypeptide An agent, such as an epitope of Mtb that causes induction of an immune response, as measured by clinical response (for example increase in a population of immune cells, increased cytolytic activity against Mtb, or measurable reduction of a symptom of an infection).
  • Therapeutically active molecules can also be made from nucleic acids. Examples of a nucleic acid based therapeutically active molecule is a nucleic acid sequence that encodes an Mtb epitope, wherein the nucleic acid sequence is operably linked to a control element such as a promoter.
  • a therapeutically effective amount of an Mtb polypeptide is an amount used to generate an immune response.
  • treatment refers to a therapeutic intervention that ameliorates a sign or symptom of tuberculosis.
  • Therapeutically effective dose A dose sufficient to prevent advancement, or to cause regression of the disease, or which is capable of relieving symptoms caused by the disease.
  • a therapeutically effective dose is a dose sufficient to prevent advancement or relieve symptoms of tuberculosis.
  • a virus or vector “transduces” a cell when it transfers nucleic acid into the cell.
  • a cell is “transformed” by a nucleic acid transduced into the cell when the DNA becomes stably replicated by the cell, either by incorporation of the nucleic acid into the cellular genome, or by episomal replication.
  • transformation encompasses all techniques by which a nucleic acid molecule might be introduced into such a cell, including transfection with viral vectors, transformation with plasmid vectors, and introduction of naked DNA by electroporation, lipofection, and particle gun acceleration.
  • Tuberculosis A disease that is generally caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis that usually infects the lungs. However, other “atypical” mycobacteria such as M. kansasii may produce a similar clinical and pathologic appearance of disease.
  • M. tuberculosis Transmission of M. tuberculosis occurs by the airborne route in confined areas with poor ventilation. In more than 90% of cases, following infection with M. tuberculosis, the immune system prevents development of disease from M. tuberculosis, often called, active tuberculosis. However, not all of the M. tuberculosis is killed, and thus tiny, hard capsules are formed. “Primary tuberculosis” is seen disease that develops following an initial infection, usually in children. The initial focus of infection is a small subpleural granuloma accompanied by granulomatous hilar lymph node infection. Together, these make up the Ghon complex.
  • tuberculosis outside of lungs can lead to the appearance of a number of uncommon findings with characteristic patterns that include skeletal tuberculosis, genital tract tuberculosis, urinary tract tuberculosis, central nervous system (CNS) tuberculosis, gastrointestinal tuberculosis, adrenal tuberculosis, scrofula, and cardiac tuberculosis.
  • CNS central nervous system
  • “Latent” tuberculosis is an Mtb infection in an individual that can be detected by a diagnostic assay, such as, but not limited to a tuberculin skin test (TST) wherein the infection does not produce symptoms in that individual.
  • TST tuberculin skin test
  • “Active” tuberculosis is a symptomatic Mtb infection in a subject.
  • the inflammation produced with TB infection is granulomatous, with epithelioid macrophages and Langhans giant cells along with lymphocytes, plasma cells, maybe a few polymorphonuclear cells, fibroblasts with collagen, and characteristic caseous necrosis in the center.
  • the inflammatory response is mediated by a type IV hypersensitivity reaction, and skin testing is based on this reaction.
  • tuberculosis can be diagnosed by a skin test, an acid fast stain, an auramine stain, or a combination thereof.
  • the most common specimen screened is sputum, but the histologic stains can also be performed on tissues or other body fluids.
  • TB is a frequent complication of HIV infection.
  • TB infection in subjects infected with a human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) can spread readily and progress rapidly to active disease.
  • Specific symptoms of lung disease due to Mtb infection include chronic cough and spitting blood.
  • Other symptoms of TB disease include fatigue, loss of appetite, weight loss, fever and drenching night sweats.
  • Vector A nucleic acid molecule as introduced into a host cell, thereby producing a transformed host cell.
  • a vector may include nucleic acid sequences that permit it to replicate in a host cell, such as an origin of replication.
  • a vector may also include one or more selectable marker gene and other genetic elements known in the art.
  • Vectors include plasmid vectors, including plasmids for expression in gram negative and gram positive bacterial cell. Exemplary vectors include those for expression in E. coli and Salmonella.
  • Vectors also include viral vectors, such as, but are not limited to, retrovirus, orthopox, avipox, fowlpox, capripox, suipox, adenoviral, herpes virus, alpha virus, baculovirus, Sindbis virus, vaccinia virus and poliovirus vectors.
  • viral vectors such as, but are not limited to, retrovirus, orthopox, avipox, fowlpox, capripox, suipox, adenoviral, herpes virus, alpha virus, baculovirus, Sindbis virus, vaccinia virus and poliovirus vectors.
  • Vectors also include vectors for expression in yeast cells
  • Mycobacterium polypeptides can be used to induce an immune response to Mtb, such as a T cell response.
  • the Mycobacterium polypeptides can be used in diagnostic assays to identify subjects infected with a Mycobacterium such as Mtb.
  • the polypeptide comprises or consists of the amino acid sequence set forth as:
  • an Mtb polypeptide of use in the methods disclosed herein has a sequence at least 75%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% homologous to the amino acid sequence set forth in one of SEQ ID NOs: 1-12.
  • the polypeptide can have an amino acid sequence, at least 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% homologous to one of the amino acid sequences set forth in SEQ ID NOs: 1-12.
  • Exemplary sequences can be obtained using computer programs that are readily available on the internet and the amino acid sequences set forth herein.
  • the polypeptide retains a function of the Mtb protein, such as binding to an antibody that specifically binds the Mtb epitope.
  • Mtb polypeptide primary amino acid sequences may result in peptides which have substantially equivalent activity as compared to the unmodified counterpart polypeptide described herein. Such modifications may be deliberate, as by site-directed mutagenesis, or may be spontaneous. All of the polypeptides produced by these modifications are included herein. Thus, a specific, non-limiting example of an Mtb polypeptide is a conservative variant of the Mtb polypeptide. A table of conservative substitutions is provided herein. Substitutions of the amino acids sequence shown in SEQ ID NOs: 1-12 can be made based on this table.
  • Mtb polypeptides are disclosed herein that can be used to detect an immune response to Mtb. These peptides include or consist of at least nine amino acids, such as nine to twenty amino acids consecutive amino acids of an Mtb polypeptide set forth above. Specific, non-limiting examples are twelve, eleven, ten amino acids, or nine consecutive amino acids of one of the Mtb polypeptides set forth above. In these examples, the Mtb polypeptide does not include the full-length amino acid sequences set forth as SEQ ID NOs: 1-12.
  • An isolated polypeptide is disclosed that includes nine to twelve consecutive amino acids from an Mtb polypeptide, wherein the isolated polypeptide comprises the amino acid sequence set forth as QTVEDEARRMW (SEQ ID NO: 13). In some embodiments, the polypeptide is nine, ten or eleven amino acids in length. In additional embodiments, the polypeptide consists of the amino acid sequence set forth as SEQ ID NO: 13.
  • An isolated polypeptide is disclosed that includes nine to twelve consecutive amino acids from an Mtb polypeptide, wherein the isolated polypeptide comprises the amino acid sequence set forth as VSAAIAGLF (SEQ ID NO: 14). In some embodiments, the polypeptide is nine, ten or eleven amino acids in length. In additional embodiments, the polypeptide consists of the amino acid sequence set forth as SEQ ID NO: 14.
  • the isolated Mtb polypeptide is included in a fusion protein.
  • the fusion protein can include the Mtb polypeptide (see above) and a second heterologous moiety, such as a myc protein, an enzyme or a carrier (such as a hepatitis carrier protein or bovine serum albumin) covalently linked to the Mtb polypeptide.
  • a polypeptide consisting of nine to twelve amino acids of one of the amino acid sequences set forth as SEQ ID NOs: 1-14 that bind MHC class I is covalently linked to a carrier.
  • a polypeptide consisting of one of the amino acid sequences set forth as one of SEQ ID NOs: 1-14 is covalently linked to a carrier.
  • the polypeptide can be a fusion protein and can also include heterologous sequences to Mtb (such as amino acid sequences of at least nine amino acids in length that are not included in SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • the immunogenic peptide is a fusion polypeptide, for example the polypeptide includes six sequential histidine residues, a ⁇ -galactosidase amino acid sequence, or an immunoglobulin amino acid sequence.
  • the polypeptide can also be covalently linked to a carrier.
  • the protein consists of the Mtb polypeptide.
  • the polypeptide can optionally include repetitions of one or more of the Mtb polypeptides disclosed herein.
  • the polypeptide includes two, three, four, five, or up to ten repetitions of one of the Mtb polypeptides described above.
  • more than one polypeptide can be included in a fusion polypeptide.
  • the polypeptide can include at least two, at least three, at least four, at least five or at least six of the amino acid sequences set forth as SEQ ID NOs: 1-14.
  • a linker sequence can optionally be included between the Mtb polypeptides.
  • Mtb polypeptides disclosed herein can be chemically synthesized by standard methods, or can be produced recombinantly.
  • An exemplary process for polypeptide production is described in Lu et al., Federation of European Biochemical Societies Letters. 429:31-35, 1998. They can also be isolated by methods including preparative chromatography and immunological separations.
  • polypeptides can also be chemically synthesized by emerging technologies. One such process is described in W. Lu et al., Federation of European Biochemical Societies Letters. 429:31-35, 1998. Polypeptides can also be produced using molecular genetic techniques, such as by inserting a nucleic acid encoding Mtb or an epitope thereof into an expression vector, introducing the expression vector into a host cell, and isolating the polypeptide (see below).
  • polynucleotides include DNA, cDNA and RNA sequences which encode the polypeptide of interest. Silent mutations in the coding sequence result from the degeneracy (i.e., redundancy) of the genetic code, whereby more than one codon can encode the same amino acid residue.
  • leucine can be encoded by CTT, CTC, CTA, CTG, TTA, or TTG; serine can be encoded by TCT, TCC, TCA, TCG, AGT, or AGC; asparagine can be encoded by AAT or AAC; aspartic acid can be encoded by GAT or GAC; cysteine can be encoded by TGT or TGC; alanine can be encoded by GCT, GCC, GCA, or GCG; glutamine can be encoded by CAA or CAG; tyrosine can be encoded by TAT or TAC; and isoleucine can be encoded by ATT, ATC, or ATA. Tables showing the standard genetic code can be found in various sources (e.g., L. Stryer, 1988, Biochemistry, 3 rd Edition, W.H. 5 Freeman and Co., NY).
  • a nucleic acid encoding an Mtb polypeptide can be cloned or amplified by in vitro methods, such as the polymerase chain reaction (PCR), the ligase chain reaction (LCR), the transcription-based amplification system (TAS), the self-sustained sequence replication system (3SR) and the Q ⁇ replicase amplification system (QB).
  • PCR polymerase chain reaction
  • LCR ligase chain reaction
  • TAS transcription-based amplification system
  • 3SR self-sustained sequence replication system
  • QB Q ⁇ replicase amplification system
  • a polynucleotide encoding the protein can be isolated by polymerase chain reaction of cDNA using primers based on the DNA sequence of the molecule.
  • a wide variety of cloning and in vitro amplification methodologies are well known to persons skilled in the art. PCR methods are described in, for example, U.S. Pat. No.
  • Polynucleotides also can be isolated by screening genomic or cDNA libraries with probes selected from the sequences of the desired polynucleotide under stringent hybridization conditions.
  • the polynucleotides encoding an Mtb polypeptide include a recombinant DNA which is incorporated into a vector into an autonomously replicating plasmid or virus or into the genomic DNA of a prokaryote or eukaryote, or which exists as a separate molecule (such as a cDNA) independent of other sequences.
  • the nucleotides of the invention can be ribonucleotides, deoxyribonucleotides, or modified forms of either nucleotide. The term includes single and double forms of DNA.
  • vectors are used for expression in yeast such as S. cerevisiae or Kluyveromyces lactis.
  • yeast expression systems such as the constitutive promoters plasma membrane H + -ATPase (PMA1), glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase (GPD), phosphoglycerate kinase-1 (PGK1), alcohol dehydrogenase-1 (ADH1), and pleiotropic drug-resistant pump (PDR5).
  • PMA1 plasma membrane H + -ATPase
  • GPD glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase
  • PGK1 phosphoglycerate kinase-1
  • ADH1 alcohol dehydrogenase-1
  • PDR5 pleiotropic drug-resistant pump
  • promoters are of use, such as GAL1-10 (induced by galactose), PHO5 (induced by low extracellular inorganic phosphate), and tandem heat shock HSE elements (induced by temperature elevation to 37° C.).
  • Promoters that direct variable expression in response to a titratable inducer include the methionine-responsive MET3 and MET25 promoters and copper-dependent CUP1 promoters. Any of these promoters may be cloned into multicopy (2 ⁇ ) or single copy (CEN) plasmids to give an additional level of control in expression level.
  • the plasmids can include nutritional markers (such as URA3, ADE3, HIS1, and others) for selection in yeast and antibiotic resistance (AMP) for propagation in bacteria. Plasmids for expression on K. lactis are known, such as pKLAC1. Thus, in one example, after amplification in bacteria, plasmids can be introduced into the corresponding yeast auxotrophs by methods similar to bacterial transformation.
  • the Mtb polypeptides can be expressed in a variety of yeast strains. For example, seven pleiotropic drug-resistant transporters, YOR1, SNQ2, PDR5, YCF1, PDR10, PDR11, and PDR15, together with their activating transcription factors, PDR1 and PDR3, have been simultaneously deleted in yeast host cells, rendering the resultant strain sensitive to drugs. Yeast strains with altered lipid composition of the plasma membrane, such as the erg6 mutant defective in ergosterol biosynthesis, can also be utilized. Proteins that are highly sensitive to proteolysis can be expressed in a yeast lacking the master vacuolar endopeptidase Pep4, which controls the activation of other vacuolar hydrolases. Heterologous expression in strains carrying temperature-sensitive (ts) alleles of genes can be employed if the corresponding null mutant is inviable.
  • ts temperature-sensitive
  • Viral vectors can also be prepared encoding the Mtb polypeptides disclosed herein.
  • a number of viral vectors have been constructed, including polyoma, SV40 (Madzak et al., 1992, J. Gen. Virol., 73:15331536), adenovirus (Berkner, 1992, Cur. Top. Microbiol. Immunol., 158:39-6; Hopkins et al., 1988, Bio Techniques, 6:616-629; Gorziglia et al., 1992, J. Virol., 66:4407-4412; Quantin et al., 1992, Proc. Nad. Acad. Sci.
  • Baculovirus Autographa californica multinuclear polyhedrosis virus; AcMNPV
  • AcMNPV Baculovirus vectors are also known in the art, and may be obtained from commercial sources (such as PharMingen, San Diego, Calif.; Protein Sciences Corp., Meriden, Conn.; Stratagene, La Jolla, Calif.).
  • Viral vectors such as poxviral vectors, that encode an Mtb polypeptide include at least one expression control element operationally linked to the nucleic acid sequence encoding the Mtb polypeptide.
  • the expression control elements are inserted in the viral vector to control and regulate the expression of the nucleic acid sequence. Examples of expression control elements of use in these vectors includes, but is not limited to, lac system, operator and promoter regions of phage lambda, yeast promoters and promoters derived from polyoma, adenovirus, retrovirus or SV40.
  • Additional operational elements include, but are not limited to, leader sequence, termination codons, polyadenylation signals and any other sequences necessary for the appropriate transcription and subsequent translation of the nucleic acid sequence encoding the Mtb polypeptide in the host system.
  • the expression vector can contain additional elements necessary for the transfer and subsequent replication of the expression vector containing the nucleic acid sequence in the host system. Examples of such elements include, but are not limited to, origins of replication and selectable markers. It will further be understood by one skilled in the art that such vectors are easily constructed using conventional methods (Ausubel et al., (1987) in “Current Protocols in Molecular Biology,” John Wiley and Sons, New York, N.Y.) and are commercially available.
  • DNA sequences encoding an Mtb polypeptide can be expressed in vitro by DNA transfer into a suitable host cell.
  • the cell may be prokaryotic or eukaryotic.
  • the term also includes any progeny of the subject host cell. It is understood that all progeny may not be identical to the parental cell since there may be mutations that occur during replication. Methods of stable transfer, meaning that the foreign DNA is continuously maintained in the host, are known in the art.
  • a polynucleotide sequence encoding an Mtb polypeptide can be operatively linked to expression control sequences.
  • An expression control sequence operatively linked to a coding sequence is ligated such that expression of the coding sequence is achieved under conditions compatible with the expression control sequences.
  • the expression control sequences include, but are not limited to, appropriate promoters, enhancers, transcription terminators, a start codon (i.e., ATG) in front of a protein-encoding gene, splicing signal for introns, maintenance of the correct reading frame of that gene to permit proper translation of mRNA, and stop codons.
  • Hosts cells can include microbial, yeast, insect and mammalian host cells. Methods of expressing DNA sequences having eukaryotic or viral sequences in prokaryotes are well known in the art.
  • suitable host cells include bacteria, archea, insect, fungi (for example, yeast), mycobacterium (such as M. smegmatis ), plant, and animal cells (for example, mammalian cells, such as human).
  • Exemplary cells of use include Escherichia coli, Bacillus subtilis, Saccharomyces cerevisiae, Salmonella typhimurium, SF9 cells, C129 cells, 293 cells, Neurospora, and immortalized mammalian myeloid and lymphoid cell lines.
  • Transformation of a host cell with recombinant DNA can be carried out by conventional techniques as are well known to those skilled in the art.
  • the host is prokaryotic, such as, but not limited to, E. coli
  • competent cells which are capable of DNA uptake can be prepared from cells harvested after exponential growth phase and subsequently treated by the CaCl 2 method using procedures well known in the art.
  • MgCl 2 or RbCl can be used. Transformation can also be performed after forming a protoplast of the host cell if desired, or by electroporation.
  • Eukaryotic cells can also be co-transformed with polynucleotide sequences encoding an Mtb polypeptide, and a second foreign DNA molecule encoding a selectable phenotype, such as the herpes simplex thymidine kinase gene.
  • Another method is to use a eukaryotic viral vector, such as simian virus 40 (SV40) or bovine papilloma virus, to transiently infect or transform eukaryotic cells and express the protein (see for example, Eukaryotic Viral Vectors, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Gluzman ed., 1982).
  • a eukaryotic viral vector such as simian virus 40 (SV40) or bovine papilloma virus
  • a Mycobacterium infection can be detected based on the presence of T cells in a biological sample, wherein the T cells specifically react with a Mtb polypeptide disclosed herein (see above).
  • a biological sample comprising T cells is obtained from s subject of interest.
  • suitable biological samples include, but are not limited to, blood samples, peripheral blood mononuclear cells, sputum, saliva, cerebral spinal fluid or samples of isolated T cells (such as CD8 + T cells and/or CD4 + T cells), lymph node tissue, lung tissue, or other tissue sample.
  • the sample is incubated with a Mycobacterium polypeptide, as disclosed herein, a polynucleotide encoding the Mtb polypeptide and an APC that expresses the Mtb polypeptide or a fragment thereof that binds MHC. The presence or absence of specific activation of the T cells is detected.
  • the CD8 + T cells and/or CD4 + T cells which recognize the peptide in the detection method have generally been presensitized in vivo to the Mtb polypeptide of interest.
  • these antigen-experienced T cells are generally present in the peripheral blood of a host which has been exposed to the antigen at a frequency of 1 to 10 6 to 1 in 10 3 peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs).
  • PBMCs peripheral blood mononuclear cells
  • the sample is isolated T cells.
  • T cells can be isolated from a subject of interest by routine techniques (such as by Ficoll/Hypaque density gradient centrifugation of peripheral blood lymphocytes, or by fluorescence activated cell sorting).
  • the T cells used in the assay are in the form of unprocessed or diluted samples, or are freshly isolated T cells (such as in the form of freshly isolated mononuclear cells (MCs) or peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs) which are used directly ex vivo, such that they are not cultured before being used in the method.
  • MCs mononuclear cells
  • PBMCs peripheral blood mononuclear cells
  • the T cells can be cultured before use, for example in the presence of one or more of the peptides, and generally also exogenous growth promoting cytokines.
  • the peptides are typically presented on the surface of cells such as APCs. Pre-culturing of the T cells may lead to an increase in the sensitivity of the method.
  • the T cells can be converted into cell lines, such as short term cell lines.
  • the T cells are incubated in vitro for two to nine days, such as about four days, at 37° C. with an Mtb polypeptide or fragment thereof that binds MHC.
  • an Mtb polypeptide or fragment thereof that binds MHC is included (at a concentration of, for example, about 5 to about 25 ⁇ g/ml, such as about 5, about 10, about 15, or about 20 ⁇ g/ml).
  • another aliquot of a T cell sample can be incubated in the absence of the Mtb polypeptide as a control.
  • mononuclear cells are separated from the sample.
  • the MCs include the T cells and antigen presenting cells (APCs).
  • APCs antigen presenting cells
  • the APCs present in the separated MCs can present the peptide to the T cells.
  • only T cells such as only CD8 + T cells, only CD4 + T cells, or only CD3 + T cells, can be purified from the sample.
  • the APC used in the method may be any cell which has MHC class I molecules on its surface. It may or may not be a specialized antigen presenting cell, such as a B cell, dendritic cell or macrophage.
  • the APC used in the method may be from the same host as the T cell. Generally, the APC is capable of presenting the peptide to a T cell.
  • the APC can be a freshly isolated ex vivo cell or a cultured cell such as a cell from of a cell line.
  • T cells derived from the sample from the subject of interest can be placed into an assay with all the Mtb polypeptides (or a pool of the Mtb polypeptides, or a specific Mtb polypeptide) which it is intended to test the relevant panel or the T cells can be divided and placed into separate assays each of which contain one or more of the peptides.
  • one or more of the polypeptides with an amino acid sequence set forth as SEQ ID NOs: 1-12, or a fragment of one or more of these polypeptides that bind MHC is utilized.
  • Two or more of any of the Mtb peptides disclosed herein can be used for simultaneous, separate or sequential use of T cells that recognize these polypeptides. Additional combinations of any of the Mtb polypeptides disclosed herein can be utilized.
  • the one or more peptide(s) is (are) provided to the presenting cell in the absence of the T cell. This cell is then provided to T cells isolated from the subject, typically after being allowed to present the peptide on its surface.
  • the duration for which the peptide is contacted with the cells will vary depending on the method used for determining recognition of the peptide. Typically 10 5 to 10 7 , such as 5 ⁇ 10 5 to 10 6 PBMCs are added to each assay. In the case where peptide is added directly to the assay its concentration is typically from 10 ⁇ 1 to 10 3 ⁇ g/ml, such as about 0.5 to about 50 ⁇ g/ml or about 1 to about 10 ⁇ g/ml.
  • the length of time for which the T cells are incubated with the peptide can be from about 4 to about 24 hours, such as from about 6 to about 16 hours, or for about 12 hours.
  • the determination of the specific recognition of the peptide by the T cells can be done by measuring the binding of the peptide to the T cells.
  • T cells which bind the peptide can be sorted based on this binding, for example using a fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS) technique.
  • FACS fluorescence activated cell sorting
  • Determination of whether the T cells recognize the peptide can also be done by detecting a change in the state of the T cells in the presence of the peptide or determining whether the T cells bind the peptide.
  • the change in state is generally caused by antigen specific functional activity of the T cell after the T cell receptor binds the peptide.
  • the peptide is bound to an MHC class I molecule, which may be present on the surface of a PBMC or an antigen presenting cell (APC).
  • T cell activation can be detected by any means known to one of skill in the art.
  • CD8 + T cell activation is detected by evaluating cytolytic activity.
  • CD8 + T cell activation and/or CD4 + T cell activation is detected by proliferation.
  • a level of proliferation that is at least two fold greater and/or a level of cytolytic activity that is at least 20% greater than in uninfected subjects indicates the presence of a Mycobacterium infection in the subject of interest.
  • the change in state of the T cell may be the start of or increase in secretion of a substance from the T cell, such as a cytokine, such as interferon (IFN)- ⁇ , IL-2 or TNF- ⁇ .
  • a substance from the T cell such as a cytokine, such as interferon (IFN)- ⁇ , IL-2 or TNF- ⁇ .
  • the substance can be detected by allowing it to bind to a specific binding agent and then measuring the presence of the specific binding agent/substance complex.
  • the specific binding agent is typically an antibody, such as polyclonal or monoclonal antibodies that binds the substance, such as the cytokine.
  • Antibodies to cytokines are commercially available, or can be made using standard techniques.
  • the specific binding agent such as the antibody is immobilized on a solid support.
  • the cytokine is allowed to bind the solid support can optionally be washed to remove material which is not specifically bound to the antibody.
  • the antibody/cytokine complex can be detected by using a second binding agent which will bind the complex, such as an antibody that is labeled (either directly or indirectly) with a label.
  • the second agent binds the substance at a site which is different from the site which binds the first agent.
  • the second binding agent can be detected by a third agent which is labeled directly or indirectly by a detectable label.
  • the second agent may include a biotin, allowing detection by a third agent which comprises a strepavidin and a label, such as an enzymatic, radioactive or fluorescent label.
  • the detection system is an ELISPOT assay, such as the assay described in PCT Publication No. WO 98/23960, incorporated herein by reference.
  • IFN- ⁇ secreted from the T cell is bound by a first IFN ⁇ specific antibody which is immobilized on a solid support.
  • the bound IFN- ⁇ is then detected using a second IFN- ⁇ specific antibody which is labeled with a detectable label.
  • Exemplary labeled antibodies are commercially available, such as from MABTECHTM (Stockholm, Sweden).
  • An exemplary ELISPOT assay is described in the Examples section below.
  • the change in state of the T cell also can be measured may be the increase in the uptake of substances by the T cell, such as the uptake of thymidine.
  • the change in state can also be measured by an increase in the size of the T cells, or proliferation of the T cells, or a change in cell surface markers on the T cell.
  • Reagents are provided herein for the detection of CD8 expressing cells (CD8 + ) that specifically bind an Mtb polypeptide as disclosed herein. These reagents are tetrameric MHC Class I/immunogenic TARP polypeptide complexes.
  • Mtb polypeptide such as a polypeptide of nine to twenty amino acids in length that specifically binds MHC class I.
  • Tetrameric MHC Class I/peptide complexes can be synthesized using methods well known in the art (Altmann et al., Science 274:94, 1996, which is herein incorporated by reference).
  • purified HLA heavy chain polypeptide and ⁇ 2-microglobulin ( ⁇ 2m) can be synthesized by means of a prokaryotic expression system.
  • a prokaryotic expression system One specific, non-limiting example of an expression system of use is the pET system (R&D Systems, Minneapolis, Minn.).
  • the heavy chain is modified by deletion of the trans-membrane and cytosolic tail and COOH-terminal addition of a sequence containing the biotin protein ligase (Bir-A) enzymatic biotinylation site.
  • Heavy chain, ⁇ 2m, and peptide are then refolded.
  • the refolded product can be isolated by any means known in the art, and then biotinylated by Bir-A. A tetramer is then produced by contacting the biotinylated product with strepavidin.
  • the strepavidin is labeled.
  • suitable labels include, but are not limited to, enzymes, magnetic beads, colloidal magnetic beads, haptens, fluorochromes, metal compounds, radioactive compounds or drugs.
  • the enzymes that can be conjugated to strepavidin include, but are not limited to, alkaline phosphatase, peroxidase, urease and B-galactosidase.
  • the fluorochromes that can be conjugated to the strepavidin include, but are not limited to, fluorescein isothiocyanate, tetramethylrhodamine isothiocyanate, phycoerythrin, allophycocyanins and Texas Red.
  • the metal compounds that can be conjugated to the strepavidin include, but are not limited to, ferritin, colloidal gold, and particularly, colloidal superparamagnetic beads.
  • the haptens that can be conjugated to the strepavidin include, but are not limited to, biotin, digoxigenin, oxazalone, and nitrophenol.
  • radioactive compounds that can be conjugated to strepavidin are known to the art, and include but are not limited to technetium 99m ( 99 Tc), 125 I and amino acids comprising any radionuclides, including, but not limited to, 14 C, 3 H and 35 S.
  • strepavidin labeled with a fluorochrome is utilized in the methods disclosed herein.
  • suspension of cells including T cells that specifically recognize an Mtb polypeptide is produced, and the cells are reacted with the tetramer in suspension.
  • these reagents are used to label cells, which are then analyzed by fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS).
  • FACS fluorescence activated cell sorting
  • a machine for FACS employs a plurality of color channels, low angle and obtuse light-scattering detection channels, and impedance channels, among other more sophisticated levels of detection, to separate or sort cells. Any FACS technique can be employed as long as it is not detrimental to the detection of the desired cells. (For exemplary methods of FACS see U.S. Pat. No. 5,061,620, incorporated herein by reference).
  • this invention provides methods for using one or more of the polypeptides described above to diagnose Mycobacterium infection, and in particular tuberculosis, using a skin test.
  • a “skin test” is any assay performed directly on a patient in which a delayed-type hypersensitivity (DTH) reaction (such as induration, swelling, reddening or dermatitis) is measured following administration into the skin, such as the intradermal injection of one or more polypeptides described above.
  • DTH delayed-type hypersensitivity
  • Such injection can be achieved using any suitable device sufficient to contact the polypeptide or polypeptides with dermal cells of the patient, such as a tuberculin syringe or 1 ml syringe.
  • the reaction is measured at least 48 hours after injection, such as between about 48 and about 72 hours after injection.
  • a DTH reaction is a cell-mediated immune response which is greater in subjects that have been exposed previously to the test antigen (the Mtb polypeptide, fragment thereof that binds MHC, or fusion protein thereof).
  • the response can be measured visually, such as using a ruler.
  • a response that is greater than about 0.5 cm in diameter, such as greater than about 1.0 cm in diameter is a positive response, and is indicative of Mycobacterium infection.
  • the Mtb polypeptides disclosed herein can be formulated for use in a skin test as pharmaceutical compositions containing a polypeptide and a physiologically acceptable carrier. These compositions typically contain one or more of the disclosed Mtb polypeptides (or a fragment thereof that binds MHC or a fusion protein thereof) in an amount ranging from about 1 ⁇ g to about 100 ⁇ g, such as from about 10 ⁇ g to about 50 ⁇ g in a volume of 0.1 ml.
  • the carrier employed in a pharmaceutical composition can be a saline solution with appropriate preservatives, such as phenol and/or TWEEN80TM.
  • the polypeptide employed in a skin test is of sufficient size such that it remains at the site of injection for the duration of the reaction period.
  • a polypeptide that is at least nine amino acids in length is sufficient.
  • the polypeptide is broken down by macrophages within hours of injection to allow presentation to T-cells.
  • Such polypeptides can contain repeats of one or more of the above disclosed sequences and/or other immunogenic or non-immunogenic sequences.
  • the determination of the recognition of the peptide by the T cells can be measured in vivo.
  • the peptide is administered to the individual and then a response which indicates recognition of the peptide may be measured.
  • the peptide is administered intradermally, typically in a similar manner to the Mantoux test.
  • the peptide can be administered epidermally.
  • the peptide is typically administered by needle, such as by injection, but can be administered by other methods such as ballistics, for example the ballistics techniques which have been used to deliver nucleic acids.
  • Published EPC Application No. EP-A-0693119 describes techniques which can typically be used to administer the peptide.
  • a polynucleotide capable of expressing the polypeptide can be administered.
  • the polynucleotide typically has any of the characteristics of the polynucleotide which is discussed below.
  • Polypeptide is expressed from the polynucleotide in vivo and recognition of the peptide in vivo may be measured.
  • from 0.001 to 1000 ⁇ g for example from 0.01 to 100 ⁇ g or 0.1 to 10 ⁇ g of polynucleotide is administered.
  • polypeptides described above are used to diagnose Mycobacterium infection, and in particular tuberculosis.
  • methods are provided for detecting Mycobacterium infection in a biological sample, using one or more of the above polypeptides, alone or in combination.
  • multiple polypeptides are employed.
  • the polypeptide(s) are used in an assay to determine the presence or absence of antibodies to the polypeptide(s) in a biological sample (such as, but not limited to, whole blood, sputum, serum, plasma, saliva, or cerebrospinal fluid) relative to a control.
  • the presence of such antibodies indicates previous sensitization to mycobacterial antigens which may be indicative of Mycobacterium infection, and in particular tuberculosis.
  • the polypeptides can be complementary, such that one component polypeptide will detect infection in samples where the infection would not be detected by another component polypeptide).
  • Complementary polypeptides may generally be identified by using each polypeptide individually to evaluate serum samples obtained from a series of patients known to be infected with Mycobacterium. After determining which samples are correctly identified as positive with each polypeptide, combinations of two or more polypeptides may be formulated that are capable of detecting infection in most, or all, of the samples tested. Complementary polypeptides are of use to improve sensitivity of a diagnostic test.
  • Mtb polypeptides can be included in an assay. Additional polypeptides from Mtb (those not described herein) optionally can be included in the assay.
  • the presence or absence of an Mtb infection in a patient may be determined by (a) contacting a biological sample obtained from a patient with one or more Mtb polypeptides; (b) detecting in the sample the presence (or absence) of an antibody that binds to the polypeptide(s); and (c) comparing the level of antibody with a control.
  • the control can be a standard value, such as a pre-determined cut-off value.
  • the control can be the amount of antibodies in a subject known to be infected with Mtb, or the amount of antibodies that specifically bind the polypeptide(s) in a subject known not to be infected with Mtb.
  • the assay involves the use of a polypeptide immobilized on a solid support.
  • Antibodies that specifically bind the polypeptide(s) of interest bind to the solid support.
  • the bound antibody can then be detected using a detection reagent that includes a detectable label.
  • Suitable detection reagents include labeled antibodies that bind to the antibody/polypeptide complex.
  • Suitable detection reagents also include second unlabeled antibodies that bind to the antibody polypeptide complex and a third antibody that specifically binds the second antibody.
  • Suitable detection reagents also include unbound polypeptide labeled with a reporter group (such as in a semi-competitive assay).
  • a competitive assay may be utilized, in which an antibody that binds to the polypeptide of interest is labeled with a reporter group is incubated with the sample. Following incubation, the antibody is then allowed to bind to the immobilized antigen after incubation of the antigen with the sample. The extent to which components of the sample inhibit the binding of the labeled antibody to the immobilized polypeptide is indicative of the reactivity of the sample with the immobilized polypeptide.
  • a solid support used in an assay disclosed herein can be any solid material to which the antigen may be attached.
  • the solid support can be a test well in a microtiter plate or a nitrocellulose or other suitable membrane.
  • the solid support may be a bead or disc, such as glass, fiberglass, latex or a plastic material such as polystyrene or polyvinylchloride.
  • the support can also be a magnetic particle or a fiber optic sensor, such as those disclosed, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 5,359,681.
  • the polypeptides can be bound to the solid support using a variety of techniques.
  • the binding of the polypeptides can be accomplished by a noncovalent association, such as adsorption, or covalent attachment, such as a direct linkage between the antigen and functional groups on the support or a linkage through a cross-linking agent.
  • binding can be achieved by contacting one or more Mtb polypeptide(s) (generally in a buffer) with the solid support for a suitable amount of time.
  • the contact time for binding is typically between about 1 hour and 1 day.
  • binding is achieved by contacting a polystyrene or polyvinylchloride solid support with an amount of the one or more Mtb polypeptide(s) ranging from about 10 ng to about 1 ⁇ g, such as about 100 ng of antigen.
  • Covalent attachment of the Mtb polypeptide(s) of interest to a solid support can generally be achieved by reacting the support with a bifunctional reagent that reacts with both the support and a functional group, such as a hydroxyl or amino group, on the polypeptide.
  • a bifunctional reagent that reacts with both the support and a functional group, such as a hydroxyl or amino group, on the polypeptide.
  • an Mtb polypeptide can be bound to supports having an appropriate polymer coating using benzoquinone or by condensation of an aldehyde group on the support with an amine and an active hydrogen on the polypeptide (Pierce Immunotechnology Catalog and Handbook, at A12 A13, 1991).
  • the assay is an enzyme linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA).
  • ELISA enzyme linked immunosorbent assay
  • This assay can be performed by first contacting a polypeptide antigen that has been immobilized on a solid support (such as in the well of a microtiter plate) with the sample in a manner such that that antibodies present within the sample that specifically bind the polypeptide of interest bind the immobilized polypeptide. Unbound sample is then removed and a detection reagent capable of binding to the immobilized antibody-polypeptide complex is added. The amount of detection reagent that remains bound is determined using a method appropriate for the specific detection reagent. For example, the detection method can detect fluorescence or the presence of an enzymatic activity.
  • the polypeptide is immobilized on the support; any remaining protein binding sites on the support are typically blocked. Any suitable blocking agent can be used to block the unbound protein binding sites, such as bovine serum albumin or TWEEN 20TM can be employed.
  • the immobilized polypeptide is then incubated with the sample, and the antibody is allowed to bind to the antigen.
  • the sample can be diluted with a suitable diluent, for example a buffer such as phosphate-buffered saline (PBS) prior to incubation.
  • PBS phosphate-buffered saline
  • an appropriate contact time is a period of time that is sufficient to detect the presence of antibody in a Mycobacterium -infected sample.
  • the contact time is sufficient to achieve a level of binding that is at least 95% of that achieved at equilibrium between bound and unbound antibody.
  • the time necessary to achieve equilibrium can be determined by assaying the level of binding that occurs over a period of time. At room temperature, an incubation time of about 30 minutes is generally sufficient.
  • Unbound sample can then be removed by washing the solid support with an appropriate buffer, such as PBS containing 0.1% TWEEN 20TM.
  • a detection reagent can then be added to the solid support.
  • a detection reagent can be any compound that binds to the immobilized antibody-polypeptide complex and can be detected.
  • the detection reagent contains a binding agent (such as, for example, Protein A, Protein G, immunoglobulin, lectin or free antigen) conjugated to a label.
  • Labels of use include enzymes (such as horseradish peroxidase), substrates, cofactors, inhibitors, dyes, radionuclides, luminescent groups, fluorescent groups and biotin.
  • the conjugation of a binding agent to a label can be achieved using methods known in the art; conjugated binding agents are also commercially available (such as from Zymed Laboratories, San Francisco, Calif., and Pierce, Rockford, Ill.).
  • the detection reagent is incubated with the immobilized antibody-polypeptide complex for an amount of time sufficient to detect the bound antibody.
  • An appropriate amount of time may generally be determined from the manufacturer's instructions or by assaying the level of binding that occurs over a period of time. Unbound detection reagent is then removed and bound detection reagent is detected using the label.
  • radioactive labels scintillation counting or autoradiographic methods can be used for detection. Spectroscopic methods may be used to detect dyes, luminescent groups and fluorescent groups used as labels. Biotin can be detected using avidin coupled to a different label, such as a radioactive label, fluorescent label or an enzymatic label. Enzymatic labels can be detected by the addition of substrate (generally for a specific period of time), followed by spectroscopic or other analysis of the reaction products.
  • the signal detected from the label that bound to the solid support is generally compared to a control.
  • the control is a standard value, such as the average mean signal obtained when the immobilized antigen is incubated with samples from an uninfected patient.
  • a sample generating a signal that is two or three standard deviations above the control is considered positive for Mycobacterium infection.
  • the control value is determined using a Receiver Operator Curve, according to the method of Sackett et al., Clinical Epidemiology: A Basic Science for Clinical Medicine, Little Brown and Co., pp. 106 107 (1985).
  • the control value is determined from a plot of pairs of true positive rates (sensitivity) and false positive rates (100% specificity) that correspond to each possible control value for the diagnostic test result.
  • the control value on the plot that encloses the largest area is the most accurate cut-off value, and a sample generating a signal that is higher than the cut-off value determined by this method is considered positive.
  • the cut-off value may be shifted to minimize the false positive rate, or to minimize the false negative rate.
  • a sample generating a signal that is higher than the cut-off value determined by this method is considered positive for tuberculosis.
  • the assay is performed in a rapid flow-through or strip test format, wherein the antigen is immobilized on a membrane, such as, but not limited to, nitrocellulose.
  • a membrane such as, but not limited to, nitrocellulose.
  • a detection reagent for example, protein A-colloidal gold
  • the detection of bound detection reagent can be performed as described above.
  • one end of the membrane to which the polypeptide is bound is immersed in a solution containing the sample.
  • the sample migrates along the membrane through a region containing the detection reagent and to the area of immobilized polypeptide.
  • the concentration of the detection reagent at the polypeptide indicates the presence of anti- Mycobacterium antibodies in the sample.
  • the concentration of detection reagent at that site generates a pattern, such as a line, that can be read visually. The absence of such a pattern indicates a negative result.
  • the amount of polypeptide immobilized on the membrane is selected to generate a visually discernible pattern when the biological sample contains a level of antibodies that would be sufficient to generate a positive signal in an enzyme linked immunosorbant assay (ELISA).
  • ELISA enzyme linked immunosorbant assay
  • the amount of polypeptide immobilized on the membrane ranges from about 25 ng to about 1 ⁇ g, such as from about 50 ng to about 500 ng. Such tests can typically be performed with a very small volume of patient serum or blood.
  • Diagnostic reagents include the use of polynucleotide sequences encoding one or more of the above disclosed Mtb polypeptides.
  • Mycobacterium infection can be detected by detecting the presence, absence, or level of mRNA encoding a Mycobacterium polypeptide in a biological sample.
  • hybridization assays are utilized, such as Northern blot or dot blot assays.
  • PCR based assays are utilized.
  • RNA isolation can be performed using purification kit, buffer set and protease from commercial manufacturers, such as QIAGEN®, according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • RNA from cells in culture can be isolated using QIAGEN® RNeasy mini-columns
  • Other commercially available RNA isolation kits include MASTERPURE®. Complete DNA and RNA Purification Kit (EPICENTRE® Madison, Wis.), and Paraffin Block RNA Isolation Kit (Ambion, Inc.).
  • Total RNA from tissue samples can be isolated using RNA Stat-60 (Tel-Test).
  • RNA prepared a biological sample can be isolated, for example, by cesium chloride density gradient centrifugation.
  • the method utilizes reverse transcriptase polymerase chain reaction (RT-PCR).
  • RT-PCR reverse transcriptase polymerase chain reaction
  • the two most commonly used reverse transcriptases are avian myeloblastosis virus reverse transcriptase (AMV-RT) and Moloney murine leukemia virus reverse transcriptase (MMLV-RT).
  • AMV-RT avian myeloblastosis virus reverse transcriptase
  • MMLV-RT Moloney murine leukemia virus reverse transcriptase
  • the reverse transcription step is typically primed using specific primers, random hexamers, or oligo-dT primers, depending on the circumstances and the goal of expression profiling.
  • extracted RNA can be reverse-transcribed using a GeneAmp RNA PCR kit (Perkin Elmer, Calif., USA), following the manufacturer's instructions.
  • the derived cDNA can then be used as a template in the subsequent PCR reaction.
  • the PCR step can use a variety of thermostable DNA-dependent DNA polymerases, it typically employs the Taq DNA polymerase, which has a 5′-3′ nuclease activity but lacks a 3′-5′ proofreading endonuclease activity.
  • TaqMan® PCR typically utilizes the 5′-nuclease activity of Taq or Tth polymerase to hydrolyze a hybridization probe bound to its target amplicon, but any enzyme with equivalent 5′ nuclease activity can be used.
  • Two oligonucleotide primers are used to generate an amplicon typical of a PCR reaction.
  • a third oligonucleotide, or probe is designed to detect nucleotide sequence located between the two PCR primers.
  • the probe is non-extendible by Taq DNA polymerase enzyme, and is labeled with a reporter fluorescent dye and a quencher fluorescent dye. Any laser-induced emission from the reporter dye is quenched by the quenching dye when the two dyes are located close together as they are on the probe.
  • the Taq DNA polymerase enzyme cleaves the probe in a template-dependent manner.
  • the resultant probe fragments disassociate in solution, and signal from the released reporter dye is free from the quenching effect of the second fluorophore.
  • One molecule of reporter dye is liberated for each new molecule synthesized, and detection of the unquenched reporter dye provides the basis for quantitative interpretation of the data.
  • TAQMAN® RT-PCR can be performed using commercially available equipment, such as, for example, ABI PRISM 7700® Sequence Detection SystemTM (Perkin-Elmer-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif., USA), or Lightcycler (Roche Molecular Biochemicals, Mannheim, Germany).
  • the 5′ nuclease procedure is run on a real-time quantitative PCR device such as the ABI PRISM 7700®. Sequence Detection System®.
  • the system includes of thermocycler, laser, charge-coupled device (CCD), camera and computer.
  • the system amplifies samples in a 96-well format on a thermocycler. During amplification, laser-induced fluorescent signal is collected in real-time through fiber optics cables for all 96 wells, and detected at the CCD.
  • the system includes software for running the instrument and for analyzing the data.
  • 5′-Nuclease assay data are initially expressed as Ct, or the threshold cycle.
  • Ct threshold cycle
  • fluorescence values are recorded during every cycle and represent the amount of product amplified to that point in the amplification reaction. The point when the fluorescent signal is first recorded as statistically significant is the threshold cycle (Ct).
  • RT-PCR is can be performed using an internal standard.
  • the ideal internal standard is expressed at a constant level among different tissues, and is unaffected by the experimental treatment.
  • RNAs most frequently used to normalize patterns of gene expression are mRNAs for the housekeeping genes glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate-dehydrogenase (GAPDH), beta-actin, and 18S ribosomal RNA.
  • GPDH glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate-dehydrogenase
  • beta-actin beta-actin
  • 18S ribosomal RNA 18S ribosomal RNA.
  • RT-PCR measures PCR product accumulation through a dual-labeled fluorigenic probe (i.e., TAQMAN® probe).
  • Real time PCR is compatible both with quantitative competitive PCR, where internal competitor for each target sequence is used for normalization, and with quantitative comparative PCR using a normalization gene contained within the sample, or a housekeeping gene for RT-PCR (see Held et al., Genome Research 6:986 994, 1996).
  • Quantitative PCR is also described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,538,848, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • Related probes and quantitative amplification procedures are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,716,784 and U.S. Pat. No.
  • RNA isolation, purification, primer extension and amplification are given in various published journal articles (see Godfrey et al. J. Molec. Diagnostics 2: 84 91, 2000; K. Specht et al., Am. J. Pathol. 158: 419 29, 2001).
  • a representative process starts with cutting about 10 ⁇ m thick sections of paraffin-embedded tissue sample. The RNA is then extracted, and protein and DNA are removed. After analysis of the RNA concentration, RNA repair and/or amplification steps can be included, if necessary, and RNA is reverse transcribed using gene specific promoters followed by RT-PCR.
  • the expression of a “house keeping” gene or “internal control” can also be evaluated. These terms are meant to include any constitutively or globally expressed gene whose presence enables an assessment of cytokine mRNA levels. Such an assessment comprises a determination of the overall constitutive level of gene transcription and a control for variations in RNA recovery.
  • the diagnostic methods disclosed herein are used for monitoring the progression of a Mycobacterium infection.
  • assays as described above for the diagnosis of a Mycobacterium infection may be performed over time, and the change in the level of reactive polypeptide(s) evaluated.
  • the assays can be performed about every 12, 24, 36, 48, 60 or 72 hours for a specified period, such as over months or weeks, and thereafter performed as needed.
  • the presence of an Mtb polypeptide, or a polynucleotide encoding the polypeptide is assessed.
  • the Mycobacterium infection is progressing in those patients in whom the level of polypeptide (such as detected using a binding agent), the level of polynucleotide, the level of antibodies, or the level of T cells increases over time.
  • the Mycobacterium infection is not progressing when the level of reactive polypeptide, the level of polynucleotide, the level of antibodies, or the level of T cells either remains constant or decreases with time. In this manner, the effectiveness of a particular therapeutic regimen can be assessed.
  • the presence of an Mtb polypeptide is assessed in a subject.
  • the subject is administered a therapeutic protocol.
  • the presence of the Mtb polypeptide is then assessed.
  • An increase or no change in the amount of the Mtb polypeptide (or polynucleotide) as compared to the amount of the Mtb polypeptide prior to the administration of the therapeutic protocol indicates that the therapeutic protocol in not effective, and the Mtb infection is progressing.
  • a decrease in the amount of the Mtb polypeptide (or polynucleotide) as compared to the amount of the Mtb polypeptide (or polynucleotide) prior to the administration of the therapeutic protocol indicates that the therapeutic protocol is effective, and that the Mtb infection is not progressing.
  • the presence of T cells such as CD8 + T cells and/or CD4 + T cells, that specifically recognize an Mtb polypeptide is assessed in a subject.
  • the subject is administered a therapeutic protocol.
  • the presence of the T cells that specifically recognize the Mtb polypeptide is then assessed.
  • An decrease or no change in the amount of CD8 + T cells and/or CD4 + T cells that specifically recognize the Mtb polypeptide as compared to the amount of the CD8 + T cells and/or CD4 + T cells, respectively, that specifically recognize the Mtb polypeptide prior to the administration of the therapeutic protocol indicates that the therapeutic protocol in not effective.
  • An increase in the amount of the CD8 + T cells and/or CD4 + T cells that specifically recognize the Mtb polypeptide as compared to the amount of the CD8 + T cells and/or CD4 + T cells that specifically recognize the Mtb polypeptide prior to the administration of the therapeutic protocol indicates that the therapeutic protocol is effective.
  • the repertoire of the CD8 response is shaped by the entry of antigen into the MHC-I processing pathway, binding of peptides and/or non-peptide antigens to MHC-I molecules, and recognition of these structures by T cells.
  • a relatively limited subset of pathogen-specific T cells emerge. While a number of commonly recognized CD4 Mtb antigens have been described (Reed et al., Microbes Infect 7:922-931, 2005) (ESAT-6, CFP10, Ag85, etc.), surprisingly little is known about common Mtb antigens recognized by human CD8 + T cells.
  • CD8 epitopes The majority of CD8 epitopes that have been identified were defined by testing of Mtb peptides selected for high affinity binding to MHC Class Ia molecules (HLA-A2 in most cases (see, for example, Lalvani, Microbes Infect 7:922-931, 1998)). In almost all of these, however, the ex vivo frequency of these T cells in Mtb-infected individuals is low or undetectable, suggesting that these specificities may not represent immunodominant responses.
  • a limited library of overlapping synthetic peptides representing several known CD4 Mtb antigens was used to determine the magnitude of the CD8 response to these antigens in persons with active tuberculosis (TB) and latent tuberculosis infection (LTBI) as well as uninfected subjects.
  • TB tuberculosis
  • LTBI latent tuberculosis infection
  • a panel of Mtb-specific CD8 + T cell clones was utilized to define minimal epitopes recognized within these antigens and determined the contribution of these novel epitopes to the ex vivo Mtb-specific CD8 response.
  • PBMC Peripheral blood mononuclear cells
  • Culture medium consisted of RPMI 1640 supplemented with 10% Fetal Bovine Sera (FBS; Bio Whittaker), 5 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 5 M 2 ME (Sigma-Aldrich), and 2 mM glutamine (GIBCO BRL).
  • FBS Fetal Bovine Sera
  • Mtb-reactive T cell clones RPMI 1640 was supplemented with 10% human serum.
  • Mtb strain H37Rv was obtained from the American Type Culture Collection (Rockville, Md.) and prepared as previously described (Lewinsohn et al., J Immunol 165:925-930, 2000). Peptides were synthesized by Genemed Synthesis, Inc, (San Francisco, Calif.).
  • Synthetic peptide pools consisted of 15-mers overlapping by 11 amino acids (aa) representing Mtb proteins demonstrated to be potent CD4 antigens.
  • Peptide pools representing CFP-10 (Berthet et al., Microbiology 144:3195-3203, 1998; Dillon et al., J Clin Microbiol 38:3285-3290, 2000), ESAT-6 (Sorenson et al., Infect Immun 63:1710-1717, 1995), Mtb39a (two pools, A &B, reference) (Dillon et al., Infect Immun 67:2941-2950, 1999), Mtb8.4 (Coler et al., J Immunol 161:2356-2364, 1998), Mtb 9.9 (Alderson et al., J Exp Med 191:551-560, 2000), (Coler et al., J Immunol 161:2356-2364, 1998), Mtb 9.9 (Alderson et
  • EBV-transformed B cell lines, LCL were either generated using supernatants from the cell line 9B5-8 (American Type Culture Collection) or obtained from the National Marrow Donor Program (NMDP; Minneapolis, Minn.). LCL were maintained by continuous passage as previously described (Heinzel et al., J Exp Med 196:1473-1481, 2002). Mtb-specific T cell clones were isolated from individuals with LTBI or active tuberculosis, using Mtb-infected DCs as APCs and limiting dilution cloning methodology as previously described (Lewinsohn et al., J Immunol 165:925-930, 2000).
  • CD8 + T cells were isolated from PBMC using negative selection using CD4 antibody-coated beads and then positive selection using CD8 antibody-coated magnetic beads per the manufacturer's instructions (Miltenyi Biotec, Auburn Calif.) or via flow cytometry.
  • CD4-PE BD Biosciences cat #555347
  • CD8-APC BD Biosciences, cat #555369
  • purity >99% were sorted on a Becton Dickenson LSR II.
  • T cells were seeded at various concentrations in the presence of a 1 ⁇ 10 5 irradiated autologous Mtb-infected DC, generated as described below, and rIL-2 (5 ng/ml) in cell culture media consisting of 200 ⁇ l of RPMI 1640 supplemented with 10% human sera. Wells exhibiting growth between 10-14 days, were assessed for Mtb specificity using ELISPOT and Mtb-infected DC as a source of APCs. T cells retaining Mtb specificity were further phenotyped for ⁇ T cell receptor expression and CD8 expression by FACS and expanded as described below. V ⁇ usage was determined using the IOTest Beta Mark Kit from Beckman Coulter.
  • Monocyte-derived DCs were prepared (Heinzel et al., supra; Romani et al., J Exp Med 180:83-93, 1994).
  • MHC binding assays The MHC-peptide binding assay utilized measures the ability of peptide ligands to inhibit the binding of a radiolabeled peptide to purified MHC molecules, and has been described in detail elsewhere (Sidney et al., 1999. UNIT 18.3 Measurement of MHC/peptide interactions by gel filtration. In Current Protocols in Immunology. Coligan et al., eds., John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1996). Briefly, purified MHC molecules, test peptides, and a radiolabeled probe peptide were incubated at room temperature in the presence of human B2-microglobulin and a cocktail of protease inhibitors.
  • binding of the radiolabeled peptide to the corresponding MHC class I molecule was determined by capturing MHC/peptide complexes on W6/32 antibody (anti-HLA A, B, and C) or B123.2 (anti-HLA B, C and some A) coated plates, and bound counts per minute (cpm) were measured using a microscintillation counter.
  • concentration of peptide yielding 50% inhibition of the binding of the radiolabeled peptide was calculated.
  • Peptides were typically tested at six different concentrations covering a 100,000-fold dose range, and in three or more independent assays. Under the conditions utilized, where [label] ⁇ [MHC] and IC 50 ⁇ [MHC], the measured IC 50 values are reasonable approximations of the true Kd values.
  • IFN- ⁇ ELISPOT assay The IFN- ⁇ ELISPOT assay was performed as described previously (Beckman et al., J Immunol 157:2795-2803, 1996). For determination of ex vivo frequencies of CD4 + or CD8 + T cells responding to Mtb infection or Mtb antigens, CD4 + or CD8 + T-cells were positively selected from PBMC using magnetic beads (Miltenyi Biotec, Auburn Calif.) as a source of responder T cells and tested in duplicate at four different cell concentrations.
  • Autologous DC (20,000 cells/well) were used as APC and DC were either infected with Mtb or pulsed with peptide pools (5 ⁇ g/ml, final concentration of each peptide) and then added to the assay.
  • T cell clones T cells (1000 or 5000 cells/well) were incubated with autologous LCL (20,000 cells/well) in the presence or absence of antigen.
  • CD8 + T cells were used from donors uninfected, with LTBI, or actively infected with Mtb. Responses were determined either directly ex vivo, or using CD8 + T cell clones obtained by limiting dilution cloning on Mtb-infected autologous DC (Lewinsohn et al., J Immunol 165:925-930, 2000). As much is known about dominant CD4 + Mtb antigens, a panel of these commonly recognized antigens was selected for further evaluation.
  • CD8 + T cells were tested against peptide pulsed DC over a range of CD8 + T cell numbers in an IFN- ⁇ ELISPOT assay. A positive assay was determined as described below and if positive, the antigen specific frequency was determined using linear regression.
  • CD8 + T cell responses between individuals with active TB and LTBI were not statistically different. While strong CD8 + T cell responses were observed against many of the antigens tested, it is equally notable that several subjects with strong Mtb directed CD8 + T cell responses did not have demonstrable responses to many of the antigens tested.
  • CD8 + T cell clones recognize known CD4 + T cell antigens HLA-Ia Antigen Clones Identified # Distinct # Distinct Donor Tb Status (#) a (#) b Antigens (#) c Epitopes (#) d D431 Active TB 1 0 0 0 D432 Active TB 14 4 2 2 D466 Active TB 11 10 1 2 D571 Active TB 7 7 1 1 D480 Active TB 6 6 1 1 D481 Active TB 11 11 1 1 D426 LTBI 1 0 0 0 D443 LTBI 1 1 1 1 D454 LTBI 2 2 2 2 D504 LTBI 7 1 1 1 Totals 61 42 10 11 a Number of clones derived from donor. b Number of clones for which cognate antigen was identified. c Total number of distinct antigens identifed from the clone set. d Total number of distinct epitopes identified from the clone set.
  • each clone was tested against lymphoblastoid cell lines (LCL) sharing at least one HLA-type with the donor ( FIG. 3D ).
  • LCL and IHW 9058 LCL which share B4501 and C1601, present the epitope to the clone, identifying both B4501 and C1601 as possible restricting alleles.
  • C1601 + D433 LCL do not present the epitope, eliminating C1601 as a candidate restricting allele. Therefore D466 D6 is restricted by HLA-B4501.
  • the minimal epitope was defined as CFP10 2-10 for D466 D6.
  • each of the individual CD8 + T cell clones were derived based on growth of Mtb-infected DC, it was determined whether or not the antigen and epitopes identified reflected immunodominant epitopes ex vivo. Two independent approaches were pursued, the first to determine if the response was present at high frequency, and the second to determine what proportion of the total response to the antigen is constituted by the epitope. To determine the ex-vivo effector cell frequency, as described in FIG. 1 , each epitope was tested using autologous DC and magnetic bead purified CD8 + T cells derived from the donor from whom the T cell clones was isolated. A summary of the effector cell frequencies is presented in Table III.
  • the epitopes reflect high frequency responses, and thus could be considered a response that has been primed by exposure to Mtb.
  • T cell clones isolated from four donors recognized CFP10.
  • magnetic bead purified CD8 + T cells from three donors with sufficient available peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMC) were tested for reactivity to each individual 15-mer peptide, the peptide pool, and peptide representing the minimal epitope.
  • PBMC peripheral blood mononuclear cells
  • CD8 + T cell responses are present in persons infected with Mtb at frequencies that are comparable to that seen following many common viral infections such as vaccinia, influenza, and CMV. All but one of the epitopes that were mapped were restricted by HLA-B molecules. The data suggest that by using a T cell driven approach to epitope identification, dominant epitopes can be defined in humans infected with Mtb.
  • the classically-restricted and non-classically-restricted T cell clones (see Table II above) that did not recognize one of the known Mtb antigen peptide pools (Rv3875, Rv3874, Rv1886c, Rv0287, Rv3763, Rv1174c, Rv1196, Rv1793, Rv2346c, Rv1037c, Rv3619c and Rv1198) were screened against a genomic peptide library.
  • This peptide library represents 389 genes, representing roughly 10% of the Mtb genome.
  • the peptides are 15mers overlapping by 11 for each gene product.
  • each peptide was synthesized individually and then pooled into 777 pools of 50 peptides in a 96 well format (nine plates). Five blank wells and one well of an irrelevant peptide pool, SIV gag, were included on each of the nine plates.
  • SIV gag an irrelevant peptide pool
  • T cell clones (5,000 cells/well of each clone), autologous DCs (20,000 cells/well), IL-2 (0.5 ng/ml) and the peptide pools (5 ug/ml, individual peptides) were incubated overnight at 37 C in the ELISPOT assay. Only one technical replicate is done per pool because 5000 T cell clones per well with a peptide antigen produced an overwhelmingly positive response, resulting in a definitive result.
  • Six classical clones from D504 were screened against the genomic peptide library, leading to the discovery of a new epitope. This epitope was from a family of four proteins that includes EsxJ, EsxW, EsxK and EsxP. These proteins share 98% homology and differ at only 3 amino acids. There is a fifth member of this family, EsxM (Rv1792), that was not included in the genomic peptide library.
  • the clones were screened against the individual fifteen-mers for these peptide pools. All six classical clones recognized EsxJ 21-35. This is a region of EsxJ that is identical to the other four members of this family. Next, 9, 10 and 11mer peptides were made from this 15mer and screened against each clone. The minimal epitope was determined to be EsxJ 24-34. In addition, the HLA restriction was found to be B5701.
  • CD8+ T-cells from a LTBI donor, D610 (SE Asian) were screened against the genomic peptide library described above. Each plate of the genomic peptide library was screened in duplicate, for a total of 18 ELISPOT plates per screen.
  • CD8 + T-cells were prepared from cryopreserved PBMC by CD8 + selection using magnetic bead separations. Resulting cell populations contained ⁇ 96% CD8 + T cells.
  • CD8 + T cells (250,000 cells/well), autologous DCs (20,000 cells/well), and IL-2 (0.5 ng/ml) were added to peptide (final 5 ug/ml, individual peptides) in the ELISPOT plates. Five media control wells are included on each plate.
  • mice can be infected by a variety of routes, including intravenous, intraperitoneal and tracheal.
  • One route is aerosolization of the organism for respiratory infection.
  • the mice are exposed to the aerosol in a chamber (wither whole body or nose only infection).
  • the dose of invention can be varied by manipulating the concentration of Mtb in the nebulizer or time of exposure.
  • a low dose infection, such as about 50 colony forming units (CFU) via aerosol results in a slow and steady increase in bacterial numbers in the lungs, generally reaching a peak in four weeks, which coincides with the peak number of T cells in the lungs.
  • the initial period is considered the acute stage of infection.
  • T cell priming is generally detectable between two and three weeks. After about four weeks the bacterial numbers stabilize, and there is a slow progressive pathologic response. This system is of use for modeling active infection.
  • compositions of interest can be evaluated using the methods described herein.
  • the effectiveness of the composition of interest can be monitored by measuring the T cell response, such as the number of CD8+ or CD4+ T cells responding to an Mtb polypeptide in a biological sample.
  • T cells with one are contacted with at least one Mycobacterium polypeptides, and an antigen presenting cell presenting the one or more Mycobacterium polypeptides.
  • the Mycobacterium polypeptides include the amino acid sequence set forth as (a) one of the amino acid sequences set forth as SEQ ID NO: 1, SEQ ID NO: 2, SEQ ID NO: 3, SEQ ID NO: 4, SEQ ID NO: 5, SEQ ID NO: 6, SEQ ID NO: 7, SEQ ID NO: 8, SEQ ID NO: 9, SEQ ID NO: 10, SEQ ID NO: 11 or SEQ ID NO: 12; or (b) at least nine to twenty consecutive amino acids of at least one of the amino acid sequences set forth as SEQ ID NO: 1, SEQ ID NO: 2, SEQ ID NO: 3, SEQ ID NO: 4, SEQ ID NO: 5, SEQ ID NO: 6, SEQ ID NO: 7, SEQ ID NO: 7, SEQ ID NO: 8, SEQ ID NO: 9, SEQ ID NO: 10, SEQ ID NO: 11 or SEQ ID NO: 12, wherein the nine to twenty consecutive amino acids specifically bind major histocompatibility complex (MHC) class I. It is determined if the determining if the T cells specifically recognize the Mycobacterium
  • mice are vaccinated with a composition according to the appropriate protocol and then rested for 4 to 6 weeks Immunized mice are infected with a low dose aerosol 50-100 CFU) of virulent M. tuberculosis and protection is evaluated by assessing the number of viable bacilli 30 days post challenge.
  • Viable counts are performed on the lung and spleen of mice by homogenizing the organs and plating serial 10-fold dilutions on 7H11 agar plates. Plates are incubated for up to 21 days and the number of colony forming units per organ determined
  • BCG vaccinated mice have approximately 1Log10 protection in their lung and spleen when compared to PBS-treated mice.
  • a biological sample is obtained prior to the administration of the composition of interest and after administration of the composition of interest.
  • biological samples are obtained from vehicle treated animals and from animals treated with the composition of interst.
  • An increase in the number of T cells that bind an Mtb polypeptide as disclosed herein indicates the composition is effective.
  • Out-bred Hartley guinea pigs are vaccinated with a composition including one or more Mtb polypeptide, or a polynucleotide encoding these one or more polypeptides and then rested for 8 to 10 weeks
  • Immunized guinea pigs are infected with a low dose aerosol (10-30 CFU) of virulent M. tuberculosis and protection is evaluated by assessing the number of viable bacilli 30 days post challenge.
  • Viable counts are performed on the lung and spleen of guinea pigs by homogenizing the organs and plating serial 10-fold dilutions on 7H11 agar plates. Plates are incubated for up to 21 days and the number of colony forming units per organ determined Lung and spleen segments are also taken for histological analyses.
  • BCG vaccinated guinea pigs have approximately 2-3Log 10 protection in their lung and spleen when compared to PBS-treated guinea pigs. In addition, BCG vaccinated guinea pigs have well defined granulomas when compared to unvaccinated animals.
  • a biological sample is obtained prior to the administration of the composition of interest and after administration of the composition of interest.
  • biological samples are obtained from vehicle treated animals and from animals treated with the composition of interst.
  • An increase in the number of T cells that bind an Mtb polypeptide as disclosed herein indicates the composition is effective.
  • the guinea pig model is similar to the mouse model, but the experiments are open-ended survival type and can last for as long as 2 years.
  • Guinea pigs develop ‘classical’ granulomas similar to humans with active tuberculosis (TB), and as lung tissue necrosis progresses, they begin to lose weight and die of TB similar to humans.
  • the number of colony forming units in the lungs and spleen can be assessed. Histological examination can also be performed to determine the degree of lung involvement and tissue destruction. After low-dose aerosol exposure in the guinea pig the number of organisms increases progressively during the first three weeks and then plateaus into a chronic state.
  • the lung and spleen are assessed for the number of CFU and the extent of pathology.
  • the relative protection of the experimental composition is compared to BCG vaccinated animals.
  • a biological sample is obtained prior to the administration of the composition of interest and after administration of the composition of interest.
  • biological samples are obtained from vehicle treated animals and from animals treated with the composition of interst.
  • An increase in the number of T cells that bind an Mtb polypeptide as disclosed herein indicates the composition is effective.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Cell Biology (AREA)
  • Microbiology (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Food Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Pathology (AREA)
  • Analytical Chemistry (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Tropical Medicine & Parasitology (AREA)
  • Communicable Diseases (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Pulmonology (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Virology (AREA)
  • Gastroenterology & Hepatology (AREA)
  • Toxicology (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Mycology (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)

Abstract

Methods for detecting an infection with Mycobacterium tuberculosis (Mtb) in a subject are disclosed. The methods include detecting the presence of CD8+ T cells that specifically recognize an Mtb polypeptide. The methods include in vitro assays for detecting the presence of CD8+ T cells in a biological sample, and in vivo assays that detect a delayed type hypersensitivity reaction. The methods can also include detecting Mtb polypeptides and polynucleotides. Reagents for the detection of an Mtb infection are also disclosed.

Description

    PRIORITY CLAIM
  • This is a continuation of U.S. Pat. No. 13/719,124, filed on Dec. 18, 2012, which is a continuation of U.S. Pat. No. 13/244,126, filed on Sep. 23, 2011, now issued as U.S. Pat. No. 8,361,707, which is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/282,862, filed on Sep. 12, 2008, now issued as U.S. Pat. No. 8,053,181, which is the U.S. National Stage of PCT Application No. PCT/US2007/006534, filed Mar. 14, 2007, which was published in English under PCT Article 21(2), which in turn claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/782,364, filed Mar. 14, 2006. The prior applications are all incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
    • STATEMENT OF GOVERNMENT SUPPORT
  • This invention was made with United States government support pursuant to grant No. NIH-R01-A148090 and grant No. NIH NIAID HHSN266200400081C N01-AI-40081 from the National Institutes of Health. The United States government has certain rights in the invention. This invention was also made with support from the Department of Veterans Affairs.
    • FIELD
  • This application relates to the field of diagnosis, specifically to methods for detecting a Mycobacterium tuberculsosis (Mtb) infection in a subject.
    • BACKGROUND
  • Mycobacteria are a genus of aerobic intracellular bacterial organisms that, upon infection of a host, survive within endosomal compartments of monocytes and macrophages. Human mycobacterial diseases include tuberculosis (caused by M. tuberculosis), leprosy (caused by M. leprae), Bairnsdale ulcers (caused by M. ulcerans), and various infections caused by M. marinum, M. kansasii, M. scrofulaceum, M. szulgai, M. xenopi, M. fortuitum, M. chelonei, M. haemophilum and M. intracellulare (see Wolinsky, E., Chapter 37 in Microbiology: Including Immunology and Molecular Genetics, 3rd Ed., Harper & Row, Philadelphia, 1980).
  • One third of the world's population harbors M. tuberculosis and is at risk for developing tuberculosis (TB). In immunocompromised patients, tuberculosis is increasing at a nearly logarithmic rate, and multidrug resistant strains are appearing. In addition, Mycobacterial strains which were previously considered to be nonpathogenic strains (e.g., M. avium) have now become major killers of immunosuppressed AIDS patients. Moreover, current Mycobacterial vaccines are either inadequate (such as the BCG vaccine for M. tuberculosis) or unavailable (such as for M. leprae) (Kaufmann, S., Microbiol. Sci. 4:324-328, 1987; U.S. Congress, Office of Technology Assessment, The Continuing Challenge of Tuberculosis, pp. 62-67, OTA-H-574, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C., 1993).
  • Inhibiting the spread of tuberculosis requires effective vaccination and accurate, early diagnosis of the disease. Currently, vaccination with live bacteria is the most efficient method for inducing protective immunity. The most common Mycobacterium employed for this purpose is Bacillus Calmette-Guerin (BCG), an avirulent strain of Mycobacterium bovis. However, the safety and efficacy of BCG is a source of controversy and some countries, such as the United States, do not vaccinate the general public.
  • Diagnosis of tuberculosis is commonly achieved using a skin test, which involves intradermal exposure to tuberculin PPD (protein-purified derivative). Antigen-specific T cell responses result in measurable induration at the injection site by 48 to 72 hours after injection, which indicates exposure to Mycobacterial antigens. However, the sensitivity and specificity of this test are not ideal; individuals vaccinated with BCG cannot be distinguished from infected individuals. Accordingly, there is a need in the art for improved diagnostic methods for detecting tuberculosis.
    • SUMMARY
  • Methods for diagnosing an infection with Mycobacterium tuberculosis (Mtb) are disclosed herein. The methods can include detecting CD8+ T cells and/or CD4+ that specifically bind an Mtb polypeptide of interest. The methods can also include detecting a delayed type hypersensitivity reaction in a subject and/or can include detecting specific Mtb polypeptides and polynucleotides. The disclosed assays can be used individually or in combination. The Mycobacterium tuberculosis infection can be a latent or active infection.
  • In several embodiments, methods are provided for detecting Mycobacterium tuberculosis in a subject. These methods include contacting a biological sample from the subject comprising T cells, such as CD8+ T cells and/or CD4+ T cells, with one or more Mycobacterium polypeptides, or an antigen presenting cell presenting the one or more Mycobacterium polypeptides. The one or more Mycobacterium polypeptides include an amino acid sequence set forth as (a) one of the amino acid sequences set forth as SEQ ID NO: 1, SEQ ID NO: 2, SEQ ID NO: 3, SEQ ID NO: 4, SEQ ID NO: 5, SEQ ID NO: 6, SEQ ID NO: 7, SEQ ID NO: 8, SEQ ID NO: 9, SEQ ID NO: 10, SEQ ID NO: 11 or SEQ ID NO: 12; or (b) at least nine to twenty consecutive amino acids of at least one of the amino acid sequences set forth as SEQ ID NO: 1, SEQ ID NO: 2, SEQ ID NO: 3, SEQ ID NO: 4, SEQ ID NO: 5, SEQ ID NO: 6, SEQ ID NO: 7, SEQ ID NO: 7, SEQ ID NO: 8, SEQ ID NO: 9, SEQ ID NO: 10, SEQ ID NO: 11 or SEQ ID NO: 12, wherein the nine to twenty consecutive amino acids specifically bind major histocompatibility complex (MHC) class I. It is determined whether the T cells specifically recognize the Mycobacterium polypeptide.
  • In additional embodiments, methods are provided for detecting Mycobacterium tuberculosis in a subject, wherein the methods include administering to the subject an effective amount of a Mycobacterium polypeptide into the skin, subcutaneously or intradermally. The Mycobacterium polypeptide includes an amino acid sequence set forth as (a) one of the amino acid sequences set forth as SEQ ID NO: 1, SEQ ID NO: 2, SEQ ID NO: 3, SEQ ID NO: 4, SEQ ID NO: 5, SEQ ID NO: 6, SEQ ID NO: 7, SEQ ID NO: 8, SEQ ID NO: 9, SEQ ID NO: 10, SEQ ID NO: 11 or SEQ ID NO: 12; or (b) at least nine to twenty consecutive amino acids of at least one of the amino acid sequences set forth as SEQ ID NO: 1, SEQ ID NO: 2, SEQ ID NO: 3, SEQ ID NO: 4, SEQ ID NO: 5, SEQ ID NO: 6, SEQ ID NO: 7, SEQ ID NO: 7, SEQ ID NO: 8, SEQ ID NO: 9, SEQ ID NO: 10, SEQ ID NO: 11 or SEQ ID NO: 12, wherein the nine to twenty consecutive amino acids specifically bind major histocompatibility complex (MHC) class I. The presence of T cells that specifically recognize the Mycobacterium polypeptide are detected in the subject.
  • In further embodiments, methods are disclosed for detecting a Mycobacterium tuberculosis infection in a subject, wherein the methods include detecting the presence of a Mycobacterium polypeptide or a polynucleotide encoding the polypeptide in a sample from the subject. The Mycobacterium polypeptide includes an amino acid sequence set forth as one of the amino acid sequences set forth as SEQ ID NO: 1, SEQ ID NO: 2, SEQ ID NO: 3, SEQ ID NO: 4, SEQ ID NO: 5, SEQ ID NO: 6, SEQ ID NO: 7, SEQ ID NO: 8, SEQ ID NO: 9, SEQ ID NO: 10, SEQ ID NO: 11 or SEQ ID NO: 12.
  • Additionally, reagents for the detection of a Mycobacterium infection in a subject are described.
  • The foregoing and other features and advantages will become more apparent from the following detailed description of several embodiments, which proceeds with reference to the accompanying figures.
    • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES
  • FIG. 1 is two graphs showing the determination of human effector cell frequencies ex vivo using the IFN-γ ELISPOT assay. Magnetic bead-purified CD8+ T cells were cultured with DC (20,000/well) either infected with Mtb (H37Rv, MOI=50) or pulsed with peptide pool representing CFP10 (5 μg/ml each peptide; 15-mers overlap 11 aa) in an IFN-γ ELISPOT assay. Each responding T cell population was tested in duplicate at four different cell concentrations. To determine the effector cell frequency of antigen-specific T cells, the average number of spots per well for each duplicate was plotted against the number of responder cells per well. Linear regression analysis was used to determine the slope of the line, which represents the frequency of antigen-specific T cells. The assay was considered positive (reflecting the presence of a primed T cell response), if the binomial probability for the number of spots was significantly different by experimental and control assays.
  • FIG. 2 is a set of graphs showing ex vivo CD8+ T cell frequencies to Mtb antigens are associated with Mtb infection. As described above (see FIG. 1), to determine ex vivo CD8+ T cell frequencies, autologous DC either infected with Mtb or pulsed with cognate peptide pools were incubated with CD8+ T cells in an IFN-γ ELISPOT assay. Subjects without evidence for Mtb infection, those with LTBI, and those with active TB (culture confirmed pulmonary tuberculosis) were evaluated. “Mtb Infected” includes those with LTBI and active tuberculosis. P values are noted where P=<0.05 (Wilcoxon/Kruskal-Wallis).
  • FIG. 3A-3D are a set of digital images showing the definition of Antigenic Specificity and HLA-Restriction (the characterization of T cell clone D466 D6). For the results shown in FIGS. 3 a-3 c, to Identify the antigen and minimal epitope recognized by T cell clone, D466 D6, T-cells (5000 cells/well) were incubated with autologous LCL (20,000/well) and 5 μg/ml of antigen. IFN-γ was assessed by ELISPOT after eighteen hours of co-culture. For the results presented in FIG. 3 a, antigens consisted of peptide pools representing known CD4+ antigens, made up of 15 amino acid (aa) peptides overlapping by 11 aa. For the results presented in FIG. 3 b, antigens consisted of individual 15 aa CFP10 peptides that together constitute the peptide pool. For the results presented in FIG. 3 c, antigens consisted of individual nested CFP101-15 peptides (10 aa, 9 aa or 8 aa), used to further map the epitope. For the results presented in FIG. 3 d, the restricting allele was identified using LCL (20,000/well) expressing HLA alleles matching D466 at one or two alleles, pulsed with CFP102-10 (5 μg/ml) as APC. After 2 hours, cells were washed and incubated with T-cells (500 cells/well) in an IFN-γ ELISPOT assay.
  • FIG. 4 is a line graph showing the confirmation of minimal epitope mapping of D466 D6. To confirm the minimal epitope, autologous LCL (20,000/well) was pulsed with peptide at the concentration indicated and co-cultured with T-cells (1000 cells/well). IFN-γ was assessed by ELISPOT after eighteen hours co-culture. Each point represents the mean of duplicate determinations.
  • FIG. 5 is a set of bar graphs showing the profiling of immunodominance pattern for CFP10. To determine the effector cell frequencies, autologous DC (20,000/well) were pulsed either with each individual 15-mer peptide (5 μg/ml), the peptide pool (PP; 5 μg/each peptide) or the minimal epitope (ME) determined from T cell clones derived from each donor (D466:CFP101-11; D480:CFP103-11; D481:CFP1075-83; 5 μg/ml), and tested against 250,000 magnetic bead purified CD8+ T cells. IFN-γ release was assessed by ELISPOT after eighteen hours of co-culture. Each point represents the mean of duplicate determinations.
  • FIG. 6A-6B is a set of graphs summarizing the minimal epitope mapping data. To determine the minimal epitope, autologous LCL (20,000/well) was pulsed with peptide at the concentration indicated and co-cultured with T-cells (1000 cells/well). IFN-γ was assessed by ELISPOT after eighteen hours co-culture. Each point represents the mean of duplicate determinations.
  • FIG. 7 is a line graph showing the mapping of Minimal Epitope for D504 Clones. To determine the minimal epitope, autologous LCL (20,000/well) was co-cultured with T-cell clones (1,000 cells/well) and the peptide at the concentration indicated. IFN-γ was assessed by ELISPOT after eighteen hours co-culture. Each point represents the mean of duplicate determinations.
    •  SEQUENCE LISTING
  • The Sequence Listing is submitted as an ASCII text file [899-77364-71_Sequence_Listing.txt, Apr. 20, 2015, 84.5 KB], which is incorporated by reference herein.
  • The nucleic and amino acid sequences listed in the accompanying sequence listing are shown using standard letter abbreviations for nucleotide bases, and three letter code for amino acids, as defined in 37 C.F.R. 1.822. Only one strand of each nucleic acid sequence is shown, but the complementary strand is understood as included by any reference to the displayed strand. In the accompanying sequence listing:
  • SEQ ID NOs: 1-12 are the amino acid sequence of Mtb polypeptides.
  • SEQ ID NOs: 13-14 are amino acids of Mtb peptides.
  • SEQ ID NOs: 15-25 are the nucleic acid sequences of polynucleotides encoding the Mtb polypeptides.
  • SEQ ID NOs: 26-38 are the amino acid sequences of specific Mtb epitopes.
    • DETAILED DESCRIPTION
  • Methods for detecting an infection with Mycobacterium tuberculosis in a subject are disclosed. The methods include detecting the presence of T cells, such as but not limited to CD8+ T cells, that specifically recognize a Mycobacterium tuberculosis (Mtb) polypeptide. The methods include in vitro assays for detecting the presence of CD8+ T cells in a biological sample, and in vivo assays that detect a delayed type hypersensitivity reaction. The methods can also include detecting Mtb polypeptides and polynucleotides. Reagents for the detection of an Mtb infection are also disclosed.
    • Terms
  • Unless otherwise noted, technical terms are used according to conventional usage. Definitions of common terms in molecular biology may be found in Benjamin Lewin, Genes V, published by Oxford University Press, 1994 (ISBN 0-19-854287-9); Kendrew et al. (eds.), The Encyclopedia of Molecular Biology, published by Blackwell Science Ltd., 1994 (ISBN 0-632-02182-9); and Robert A. Meyers (ed.), Molecular Biology and Biotechnology: a Comprehensive Desk Reference, published by VCH Publishers, Inc., 1995 (ISBN 1-56081-569-8).
  • In order to facilitate review of the various embodiments of this disclosure, the following explanations of specific terms are provided:
  • Adjuvant: A vehicle used to enhance antigenicity. Adjuvants include a suspension of minerals (alum, aluminum hydroxide, or phosphate) on which antigen is adsorbed; or water-in-oil emulsion in which antigen solution is emulsified in mineral oil (Freund incomplete adjuvant), sometimes with the inclusion of killed mycobacteria (Freund's complete adjuvant) to further enhance antigenicity (inhibits degradation of antigen and/or causes influx of macrophages) Immunostimulatory oligonucleotides (such as those including a CpG motif) can also be used as adjuvants (for example see U.S. Pat. No. 6,194,388; U.S. Pat. No. 6,207,646; U.S. Pat. No. 6,214,806; U.S. Pat. No. 6,218,371; U.S. Pat. No. 6,239,116; U.S. Pat. No. 6,339,068; U.S. Pat. No. 6,406,705; and U.S. Pat. No. 6,429,199). Adjuvants include biological molecules (a “biological adjuvant”), such as costimulatory molecules. Exemplary adjuvants include IL-2, RANTES, GM-CSF, TNF-α, IFN-γ, G-CSF, LFA-3, CD72, B7-1, B7-2, OX-40L and 41 BBL
  • Amplification: Of a nucleic acid molecule (e.g., a DNA or RNA molecule) refers to use of a technique that increases the number of copies of a nucleic acid molecule in a specimen. An example of amplification is the polymerase chain reaction, in which a biological sample collected from a subject is contacted with a pair of oligonucleotide primers, under conditions that allow for the hybridization of the primers to a nucleic acid template in the sample. The primers are extended under suitable conditions, dissociated from the template, and then re-annealed, extended, and dissociated to amplify the number of copies of the nucleic acid. The product of amplification can be characterized by electrophoresis, restriction endonuclease cleavage patterns, oligonucleotide hybridization or ligation, and/or nucleic acid sequencing using standard techniques. Other examples of amplification include strand displacement amplification, as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,744,311; transcription-free isothermal amplification, as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,033,881; repair chain reaction amplification, as disclosed in WO 90/01069; ligase chain reaction amplification, as disclosed in EP-A-320 308; gap filling ligase chain reaction amplification, as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,427,930; and NASBA™ RNA transcription-free amplification, as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,025,134.
  • Antigen: A compound, composition, or substance that can stimulate the production of antibodies or a T cell response in an animal, including compositions that are injected or absorbed into an animal. An antigen reacts with the products of specific humoral or cellular immunity, including those induced by heterologous immunogens. The term “antigen” includes all related antigenic epitopes. “Epitope” or “antigenic determinant” refers to a site on an antigen to which B and/or T cells respond. In one embodiment, T cells respond to the epitope, when the epitope is presented in conjunction with an MHC molecule. Epitopes can be formed both from contiguous amino acids or noncontiguous amino acids juxtaposed by tertiary folding of a protein. Epitopes formed from contiguous amino acids are typically retained on exposure to denaturing solvents whereas epitopes formed by tertiary folding are typically lost on treatment with denaturing solvents. An epitope typically includes at least 3, and more usually, at least 5, about 9, or about 8-10 amino acids in a unique spatial conformation. Methods of determining spatial conformation of epitopes include, for example, x-ray crystallography and 2-dimensional nuclear magnetic resonance.
  • An antigen can be a tissue-specific antigen, or a disease-specific antigen. These terms are not exclusive, as a tissue-specific antigen can also be a disease specific antigen. A tissue-specific antigen is expressed in a limited number of tissues, such as a single tissue. A tissue specific antigen may be expressed by more than one tissue, such as, but not limited to, an antigen that is expressed in more than one reproductive tissue, such as in both prostate and uterine tissue. A disease-specific antigen is expressed coincidentally with a disease process. Specific non-limiting examples of a disease-specific antigen are an antigen whose expression correlates with, or is predictive of, tuberculosis. A disease-specific antigen can be an antigen recognized by T cells or B cells.
  • Antibody: Immunoglobulin molecules and immunologically active portions of immunoglobulin molecules, i.e., molecules that contain an antigen binding site that specifically binds (immunoreacts with) an antigen, such as an Mtb polypeptide.
  • A naturally occurring antibody (e.g., IgG, IgM, IgD) includes four polypeptide chains, two heavy (H) chains and two light (L) chains interconnected by disulfide bonds. However, it has been shown that the antigen-binding function of an antibody can be performed by fragments of a naturally occurring antibody. Thus, these antigen-binding fragments are also intended to be designated by the term “antibody.” Specific, non-limiting examples of binding fragments encompassed within the term antibody include (i) a Fab fragment consisting of the VL, VH, CL and CH1 domains; (ii) an Fa fragment consisting of the VH and CH1 domains; (iii) an Fv fragment consisting of the VL and VH domains of a single arm of an antibody, (iv) a dAb fragment (Ward et al., Nature 341:544-546, 1989) which consists of a VH domain; (v) an isolated complementarity determining region (CDR); and (vi) a F(ab′)2 fragment, a bivalent fragment comprising two Fab fragments linked by a disulfide bridge at the hinge region.
  • Immunoglobulins and certain variants thereof are known and many have been prepared in recombinant cell culture (e.g., see U.S. Pat. No. 4,745,055; U.S. Pat. No. 4,444,487; WO 88/03565; EP 256,654; EP 120,694; EP 125,023; Faoulkner et al., Nature 298:286, 1982; Morrison, J. Immunol. 123:793, 1979; Morrison et al., Ann Rev. Immunol 2:239, 1984).
  • Animal: Living multi-cellular vertebrate organisms, a category that includes, for example, mammals and birds. The term mammal includes both human and non-human mammals. Similarly, the term “subject” includes both human and veterinary subjects.
  • Antibody: Immunoglobulin molecules and immunologically active portions of immunoglobulin molecules, i.e., molecules that contain an antigen binding site that specifically binds (immunoreacts with) an antigen.
  • A naturally occurring antibody (e.g., IgG, IgM, IgD) includes four polypeptide chains, two heavy (H) chains and two light (L) chains interconnected by disulfide bonds. However, it has been shown that the antigen-binding function of an antibody can be performed by fragments of a naturally occurring antibody. Thus, these antigen-binding fragments are also intended to be designated by the term “antibody.” Specific, non-limiting examples of binding fragments encompassed within the term antibody include (i) a Fab fragment consisting of the VL, VH, CL and CH1 domains; (ii) an Fd fragment consisting of the VH and CH1 domains; (iii) an Fv fragment consisting of the VL and VH domains of a single arm of an antibody, (iv) a dAb fragment (Ward et al., Nature 341:544-546, 1989) which consists of a VH domain; (v) an isolated complimentarity determining region (CDR); and (vi) a F(ab′)2 fragment, a bivalent fragment comprising two Fab fragments linked by a disulfide bridge at the hinge region.
  • Immunoglobulins and certain variants thereof are known and many have been prepared in recombinant cell culture (e.g., see U.S. Pat. No. 4,745,055; U.S. Pat. No. 4,444,487; WO 88/03565; EP 256,654; EP 120,694; EP 125,023; Faoulkner et al., Nature 298:286, 1982; Morrison, J. Immunol. 123:793, 1979; Morrison et al., Ann Rev. Immunol 2:239, 1984).
  • Antigen presenting cell (APC): A cell that can present an antigen to T cell, such that the T cells are activated. Dendritic cells are the principle antigen presenting cells (APCs) involved in primary immune responses. Their major function is to obtain antigen in tissues, migrate to lymphoid organs and present the antigen in order to activate T cells.
  • When an appropriate maturational cue is received, dendritic cells are signaled to undergo rapid morphological and physiological changes that facilitate the initiation and development of immune responses. Among these are the up-regulation of molecules involved in antigen presentation; production of pro-inflammatory cytokines, including IL-12, key to the generation of Th1 responses; and secretion of chemokines that help to drive differentiation, expansion, and migration of surrounding naive Th cells. Collectively, these up-regulated molecules facilitate the ability of dendritic cells to coordinate the activation and effector function of other surrounding lymphocytes that ultimately provide protection for the host.
  • cDNA (complementary DNA): A piece of DNA lacking internal, non-coding segments (introns) and regulatory sequences that determine transcription. cDNA is synthesized in the laboratory by reverse transcription from messenger RNA extracted from cells.
  • CD4: Cluster of differentiation factor 4, a T cell surface protein that mediates interaction with the MHC Class II molecule. CD4 also serves as the primary receptor site for HIV on T cells during HIV infection. Cells that express CD4 are often helper T cells.
  • CD8: Cluster of differentiation factor 8, a T cell surface protein that mediates interaction with the MHC Class I molecule. Cells that express CD8 are often cytotoxic T cells. “CD8+ T cell mediated immunity” is an immune response implemented by presentation of antigens to CD8+ T cells.
  • cDNA (complementary DNA): A piece of DNA lacking internal, non-coding segments (introns) and regulatory sequences that determine transcription. cDNA is synthesized in the laboratory by reverse transcription from messenger RNA extracted from cells.
  • Conservative variants: “Conservative” amino acid substitutions are those substitutions that do not substantially affect or decrease an activity or antigenicity of the Mycobacterium polypeptide. Specific, non-limiting examples of a conservative substitution include the following examples:
  • Original Residue Conservative Substitutions
    Ala Ser
    Arg Lys
    Asn Gln, His
    Asp Glu
    Cys Ser
    Gln Asn
    Glu Asp
    His Asn; Gln
    Ile Leu, Val
    Leu Ile; Val
    Lys Arg; Gln; Glu
    Met Leu; Ile
    Phe Met; Leu; Tyr
    Ser Thr
    Thr Ser
    Trp Tyr
    Tyr Trp; Phe
    Val Ile; Leu
  • The term conservative variation also includes the use of a substituted amino acid in place of an unsubstituted parent amino acid, provided that antibodies raised to the substituted polypeptide also immunoreact with the unsubstituted polypeptide, or that an immune response can be generated against the substituted polypeptide that is similar to the immune response against and unsubstituted polypeptide, such a Mycobacterium antigen. Thus, in one embodiment, non-conservative substitutions are those that reduce an activity or antigenicity.
  • Consists Essentially Of/Consists Of: With regard to a polypeptide, a polypeptide that consists essentially of a specified amino acid sequence if it does not include any additional amino acid residues. However, the polypeptide can include additional non-peptide components, such as labels (for example, fluorescent, radioactive, or solid particle labels), sugars or lipids. A polypeptide that consists of a specified amino acid sequence does not include any additional amino acid residues, nor does it include additional non-peptide components, such as lipids, sugars or labels.
  • Contacting: The process of incubating one agent in the presence of another. Thus, when a cell is contacted with an agent, the cell is incubated with the agent for a sufficient period of time for the agent and the cell to interact.
  • Costimulatory molecule: Although engagement of the TCR with peptide-MHC delivers one signal to the T cell, this signal alone can be insufficient to activate the T cell. Costimulatory molecules are molecules that, when bound to their ligand, deliver a second signal required for the T cell to become activated. The most well-known costimulatory molecule on the T cell is CD28, which binds to either B7-1 (also called CD80) or B7-2 (also known as CD86). An additional costimulatory molecule is B7-3. Accessory molecules that also provide a second signal for the activation of T cells include intracellular adhesion molecule (ICAM-1 and ICAM-2), leukocyte function associated antigen (LFA-1, LFA-2 and LFA-3). Integrins and tumor necrosis factor (TNF) superfamily members can also serve as co-stimulatory molecules.
  • Cytokine: Proteins made by cells that affect the behavior of other cells, such as lymphocytes. In one embodiment, a cytokine is a chemokine, a molecule that affects cellular trafficking. Specific, non-limiting examples of cytokines include the interleukins (IL-2, IL-4, IL-6, IL-10, IL-21, etc.), and interferon (IFN)-γ.
  • Degenerate variant: A polynucleotide encoding an epitope of an Mtb polypeptide that includes a sequence that is degenerate as a result of the genetic code. There are 20 natural amino acids, most of which are specified by more than one codon. Therefore, all degenerate nucleotide sequences are included in this disclosure as long as the amino acid sequence of the Mtb polypeptide encoded by the nucleotide sequence is unchanged.
  • Dendritic cell (DC): Dendritic cells are the principle antigen presenting cells (APCs) involved in primary immune responses. Dendritic cells include plasmacytoid dendritic cells and myeloid dendritic cells. Their major function is to obtain antigen in tissues, migrate to lymphoid organs and present the antigen in order to activate T cells Immature dendritic cells originate in the bone marrow and reside in the periphery as immature cells.
  • Diagnostic: Identifying the presence or nature of a pathologic condition, such as, but not limited to, tuberculosis. Diagnostic methods differ in their sensitivity and specificity. The “sensitivity” of a diagnostic assay is the percentage of diseased individuals who test positive (percent of true positives). The “specificity” of a diagnostic assay is 1 minus the false positive rate, where the false positive rate is defined as the proportion of those without the disease who test positive. While a particular diagnostic method may not provide a definitive diagnosis of a condition, it suffices if the method provides a positive indication that aids in diagnosis. “Prognostic” means predicting the probability of development (for example, severity) of a pathologic condition, such as tuberculosis.
  • Displaying: The process of localizing a peptide:antigen complex, or a peptide, on the outer surface of a cell where the peptide:antigen complex or peptide is accessible to a second cell, molecules displayed by a second cell, or soluble factors. A peptide, or a peptide:antigen complex, is “displayed” by a cell when it is present on the outer surface of the cell and is accessible to a second cell, to molecules displayed by the second cell, or to soluble factors.
  • Epitope: An antigenic determinant. These are particular chemical groups or peptide sequences on a molecule that are antigenic, i.e. that elicit a specific immune response. An antibody specifically binds a particular antigenic epitope on a polypeptide, such a Mycobacterium polypeptide.
  • Expression Control Sequences: Nucleic acid sequences that regulate the expression of a heterologous nucleic acid sequence to which it is operatively linked. Expression control sequences are operatively linked to a nucleic acid sequence when the expression control sequences control and regulate the transcription and, as appropriate, translation of the nucleic acid sequence. Thus expression control sequences can include appropriate promoters, enhancers, transcription terminators, a start codon (i.e., ATG) in front of a protein-encoding gene, splicing signal for introns, maintenance of the correct reading frame of that gene to permit proper translation of mRNA, and stop codons. The term “control sequences” is intended to include, at a minimum, components whose presence can influence expression, and can also include additional components whose presence is advantageous, for example, leader sequences and fusion partner sequences. Expression control sequences can include a promoter.
  • A promoter is a minimal sequence sufficient to direct transcription. Also included are those promoter elements which are sufficient to render promoter-dependent gene expression controllable for cell-type specific, tissue-specific, or inducible by external signals or agents; such elements may be located in the 5′ or 3′ regions of the gene. Both constitutive and inducible promoters, are included (see e.g., Bitter et al., Methods in Enzymology 153:516-544, 1987). For example, when cloning in bacterial systems, inducible promoters such as pL of bacteriophage lambda , plac, ptrp, ptac (ptrp-lac hybrid promoter) and the like may be used. In one embodiment, when cloning in mammalian cell systems, promoters derived from the genome of mammalian cells (e.g., metallothionein promoter) or from mammalian viruses (e.g., the retrovirus long terminal repeat; the adenovirus late promoter; the vaccinia virus 7.5K promoter) can be used. Promoters produced by recombinant DNA or synthetic techniques may also be used to provide for transcription of the nucleic acid sequences. In one embodiment, the promoter is a cytomegalovirus promoter.
  • Fractionating: Subjecting a sample to conditions or procedures which separate the components of the sample based on physical or chemical properties such as, but not limited to, size, charge, solubility, or composition. Example of fractionation procedures include, but are not limited to, selective precipitation, organic extraction, size exclusion dialysis or chromatography, such as ion exchange chromatography. In one embodiment, a fraction is a soluble extract or an organic extract of an organism, such as a Mycobacterium.
  • Functionally Equivalent: Sequence alterations, such as in an epitope of an antigen, that yield the same results as described herein. Such sequence alterations can include, but are not limited to, conservative substitutions, deletions, mutations, frameshifts, and insertions.
  • Heterologous: Originating from separate genetic sources or species. A polypeptide that is heterologous to an Mtb polypeptide originates from a nucleic acid that does not encode the Mtb polypeptide. In one specific, non-limiting example, a polypeptide comprising nine consecutive amino acids from an Mtb polypeptide, or at most 20 consecutive amino acids from the Mtb polypeptide, and a heterologous amino acid sequence includes a β-galactosidase, a maltose binding protein, and albumin, hepatitis B surface antigen, or an immunoglobulin amino acid sequence. Generally, an antibody that specifically binds to a protein of interest will not specifically bind to a heterologous protein.
  • Host cells: Cells in which a vector can be propagated and its DNA expressed. The cell may be prokaryotic or eukaryotic. The cell can be mammalian, such as a human cell. The term also includes any progeny of the subject host cell. It is understood that all progeny may not be identical to the parental cell since there may be mutations that occur during replication. However, such progeny are included when the term “host cell” is used.
  • Human Leukocyte Antigen (HLA): A genetic designation of the human major histocompatibility complex (MHC). Individual loci are designated by uppercase letters, as in HLA-E, and alleles are designated by numbers, as in HLA-A*0201. The three main MHC class I genes are called HLA-A, HLA-B, and HLA-C. However, there are many genes that encode 32 microglobulin-associated cell surface molecules that are linked to the MHC class I genes. The expression of these genes is variable, both in the tissue distribution and the amount expressed on cells; these genes have been termed the MHC class IB genes.
  • Immune response: A response of a cell of the immune system, such as a B cell, natural killer cell, or a T cell, to a stimulus. In one embodiment, the response is specific for a particular antigen (an “antigen-specific response”). In one embodiment, an immune response is a T cell response, such as a Th1, Th2, or Th3 response. In another embodiment, an immune response is a response of a suppressor T cell.
  • Immunogenic peptide: A peptide which comprises an allele-specific motif or other sequence such that the peptide will bind an MHC molecule and induce a T cell response, such as a CD8+ T cell response, or a B cell response (such as antibody production) against the antigen from which the immunogenic peptide is derived.
  • In one embodiment, immunogenic peptides are identified using sequence motifs or other methods, such as neural net or polynomial determinations, known in the art. Typically, algorithms are used to determine the “binding threshold” of peptides to select those with scores that give them a high probability of binding at a certain affinity and will be immunogenic. The algorithms are based either on the effects on MHC binding of a particular amino acid at a particular position, the effects on antibody binding of a particular amino acid at a particular position, or the effects on binding of a particular substitution in a motif-containing peptide. Within the context of an immunogenic peptide, a “conserved residue” is one which appears in a significantly higher frequency than would be expected by random distribution at a particular position in a peptide. In one embodiment, a conserved residue is one where the MHC structure may provide a contact point with the immunogenic peptide.
  • Immunogenic peptides can also be identified by measuring their binding to a specific MHC protein and by their ability to stimulate CD4 and/or CD8 when presented in the context of the MHC protein. In one example, an immunogenic “Mtb peptide” is a series of contiguous amino acid residues from the Mtb protein generally between 9 and 20 amino acids in length, such as about 8 to 11 residues in length. Specific immunogenic polypeptides are disclosed herein that are 9 or 10 amino acid residues in length, or at most 12 amino acids in length.
  • Generally, immunogenic Mtb polypeptides can be used to induce an immune response in a subject, such as a B cell response or a T cell response. In one example, an immunogenic Mtb polypeptide, when bound to a Major Histocompatibility Complex Class I molecule, activates CD8+ T cells, such as cytotoxic T lymphocytes (CTLs) against Mtb. Induction of CTLs using synthetic peptides and CTL cytotoxicity assays known in the art, see U.S. Pat. No. 5,662,907, which is incorporated herein by reference. In one example, an immunogenic peptide includes an allele-specific motif or other sequence such that the peptide will bind an MHC molecule and induce a CD8+ response against the antigen from which the immunogenic peptide is derived. A CD8+ T cell that specifically recognizes an Mtb polypeptide is activated, proliferates, and/or secretes cytokines in response to that specific polypeptide, and not to other, non-related polypeptides.
  • Immunogenic composition: A composition comprising an immunogenic Mtb polypeptide or a nucleic acid encoding the immunogenic Mtb polypeptide that induces a measurable T response against Mtb, such as a CD8+ T cell response, or induces a measurable B cell response (such as production of antibodies that specifically bind an Mtb polypeptide). For in vitro use, the immunogenic composition can consist of the isolated nucleic acid, vector including the nucleic acid/or immunogenic peptide. For in vivo use, the immunogenic composition will typically comprise the nucleic acid, vector including the nucleic acid, and or immunogenic polypeptide, in pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, and/or other agents. An immunogenic composition can optionally include an adjuvant, a costimulatory molecule, or a nucleic acid encoding a costimulatory molecule. An Mtb polypeptide, or nucleic acid encoding the polypeptide, can be readily tested for its ability to induce a CD8+ T cell response.
  • Inhibiting or treating a disease: Inhibiting a disease, such as tuberculosis, refers to inhibiting the full development of a disease. In several examples, inhibiting a disease refers to lessening symptoms of a tuberculosis. “Treatment” refers to a therapeutic intervention that ameliorates a sign or symptom of a disease or pathological condition related to the disease, such as tuberculosis.
  • Interferon gamma (γ): IFN-γ is a dimeric protein with subunits of 146 amino acids. The protein is glycosylated at two sites, and the pI is 8.3-8.5. IFN-γ is synthesized as a precursor protein of 166 amino acids including a secretory signal sequence of 23 amino acids. Two molecular forms of the biologically active protein of 20 and 25 kDa have been described. Both of them are glycosylated at position 25. The 25 kDa form is also glycosylated at position 97. The observed differences of natural IFN-γ with respect to molecular mass and charge are due to variable glycosylation patterns. 40-60 kDa forms observed under non-denaturing conditions are dimers and tetramers of IFN-γ. The human gene has a length of approximately 6 kb. It contains four exons and maps to chromosome 12q24.1.
  • IFN-γ can be detected by sensitive immunoassays, such as an ELSA test that allows detection of individual cells producing IFN-γ. Minute amounts of IFN-γ can be detected indirectly by measuring IFN-induced proteins such as Mx protein. The induction of the synthesis of IP-10 has been used also to measure IFN-γ concentrations. In addition, bioassays can be used to detect IFN-γ, such as an assay that employs induction of indoleamine 2,3-dioxygenase activity in 2D9 cells. The production of IFN-γ can be used to assess T cell activation, such as activation of a T cell by an HLA-E presented Mycobacterium antigen.
  • Isolated: An “isolated” nucleic acid has been substantially separated or purified away from other nucleic acid sequences in the cell of the organism in which the nucleic acid naturally occurs, i.e., other chromosomal and extrachromosomal DNA and RNA. The term “isolated” thus encompasses nucleic acids purified by standard nucleic acid purification methods. The term also embraces nucleic acids prepared by recombinant expression in a host cell as well as chemically synthesized nucleic acids.
  • Label: A detectable compound or composition that is conjugated directly or indirectly to another molecule to facilitate detection of that molecule. Specific, non-limiting examples of labels include fluorescent tags, enzymatic linkages, and radioactive isotopes.
  • Linker sequence: A linker sequence is an amino acid sequence that covalently links two polypeptide domains. Linker sequences can be included in the between the Mtb epitopes disclosed herein to provide rotational freedom to the linked polypeptide domains and thereby to promote proper domain folding and presentation to the MHC. By way of example, in a recombinant polypeptide comprising two Mtb domains, linker sequences can be provided between them, such as a polypeptide comprising Mtb polypeptide-linker-Mtb polypeptide. Linker sequences, which are generally between 2 and 25 amino acids in length, are well known in the art and include, but are not limited to, the glycine(4)-serine spacer (GGGGS x3) described by Chaudhary et al., Nature 339:394-397, 1989.
  • Lymphocytes: A type of white blood cell that is involved in the immune defenses of the body. There are two main types of lymphocytes: B cells and T cells.
  • Mammal: This term includes both human and non-human mammals. Similarly, the term “patient” or “subject” includes both human and veterinary subjects.
  • Mycobacteria: A genus of aerobic intracellular bacterial organisms. Upon invasion of a host, these organisms survive within endosomal compartments of monocytes and macrophages. Human mycobacterial diseases include tuberculosis (cause by M. tuberculosis), Leprosy (caused by M. leprae), Bairnsdale ulcers (caused by M. ulcerans), and other infections that can be caused by M. marinum, M. kansasii, M. scrofulaceum, M. szulgai, M. xenopi, M. fortuitum, M. haemophilum, M. chelonei, and M. intracelluare. Mycobacterium strains that were previously considered to be nonpathogenic (such as M. avium) are also now known to be major killers of immunosuppressed AIDS patients.
  • The major response to mycobacteria involves cell mediated hypersensitivity (DTH) reactions with T cells and macrophages playing major roles in the intracellular killing and walling off (or containing) of the organism (granuloma formation). A major T cell response involves CD4+ lymphocytes that recognize myocbacterial heat shock proteins and immunodominant antigens.
  • Operably linked: A first nucleic acid sequence is operably linked with a second nucleic acid sequence when the first nucleic acid sequence is placed in a functional relationship with the second nucleic acid sequence. For instance, a promoter is operably linked to a coding sequence if the promoter effects the transcription or expression of the coding sequence. Generally, operably linked DNA sequences are contiguous and, where necessary to join two protein coding regions, the open reading frames are aligned.
  • ORF (open reading frame): A series of nucleotide triplets (codons) coding for amino acids without any termination codons. These sequences are usually translatable into a polypeptide.
  • Peptide Modifications: Mycobacterium polypeptides include synthetic embodiments of peptides described herein. In addition, analogues (non-peptide organic molecules), derivatives (chemically functionalized peptide molecules obtained starting with the disclosed peptide sequences) and variants (homologs) of these proteins can be utilized in the methods described herein. Each polypeptide of the invention is comprised of a sequence of amino acids, which may be either L- and/or D-amino acids, naturally occurring and otherwise.
  • Peptides may be modified by a variety of chemical techniques to produce derivatives having essentially the same activity as the unmodified peptides, and optionally having other desirable properties. For example, carboxylic acid groups of the protein, whether carboxyl-terminal or side chain, may be provided in the form of a salt of a pharmaceutically-acceptable cation or esterified to form a C1-C16 ester, or converted to an amide of formula NR1R2 wherein R1 and R2 are each independently H or C1-C16 alkyl, or combined to form a heterocyclic ring, such as a 5- or 6-membered ring. Amino groups of the peptide, whether amino-terminal or side chain, may be in the form of a pharmaceutically-acceptable acid addition salt, such as the HCl, HBr, acetic, benzoic, toluene sulfonic, maleic, tartaric and other organic salts, or may be modified to C1-C16 alkyl or dialkyl amino or further converted to an amide.
  • Hydroxyl groups of the peptide side chains may be converted to C1-C16 alkoxy or to a C1-C16 ester using well-recognized techniques. Phenyl and phenolic rings of the peptide side chains may be substituted with one or more halogen atoms, such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine, or with C1-C16 alkyl, C1-C16 alkoxy, carboxylic acids and esters thereof, or amides of such carboxylic acids. Methylene groups of the peptide side chains can be extended to homologous C2-C4 alkylenes. Thiols can be protected with any one of a number of well-recognized protecting groups, such as acetamide groups. Those skilled in the art will also recognize methods for introducing cyclic structures into the peptides of this invention to select and provide conformational constraints to the structure that result in enhanced stability.
  • Peptidomimetic and organomimetic embodiments are envisioned, whereby the three-dimensional arrangement of the chemical constituents of such peptido- and organomimetics mimic the three-dimensional arrangement of the peptide backbone and component amino acid side chains, resulting in such peptido- and organomimetics of a Mycobacterium polypeptide having measurable or enhanced ability to generate an immune response. For computer modeling applications, a pharmacophore is an idealized, three-dimensional definition of the structural requirements for biological activity. Peptido- and organomimetics can be designed to fit each pharmacophore with current computer modeling software (using computer assisted drug design or CADD). See Walters, “Computer-Assisted Modeling of Drugs”, in Klegerman & Groves, eds., 1993, Pharmaceutical Biotechnology, Interpharm Press: Buffalo Grove, Ill., pp. 165-174 and Principles of Pharmacology Munson (ed.) 1995, Ch. 102, for descriptions of techniques used in CADD. Also included are mimetics prepared using such techniques.
  • Pharmaceutical agent or drug: A chemical compound or composition capable of inducing a desired therapeutic or prophylactic effect when properly administered to a subject.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers: The pharmaceutically acceptable carriers useful with the polypeptides and nucleic acids described herein are conventional. Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, by E. W. Martin, Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa., 15th Edition (1975), describes compositions and formulations suitable for pharmaceutical delivery of the fusion proteins herein disclosed.
  • In general, the nature of the carrier will depend on the particular mode of administration being employed. For instance, parenteral formulations usually comprise injectable fluids that include pharmaceutically and physiologically acceptable fluids such as water, physiological saline, balanced salt solutions, aqueous dextrose, glycerol or the like as a vehicle. For solid compositions (e.g., powder, pill, tablet, or capsule forms), conventional non-toxic solid carriers can include, for example, pharmaceutical grades of mannitol, lactose, starch, or magnesium stearate. In addition to biologically-neutral carriers, pharmaceutical compositions to be administered can contain minor amounts of non-toxic auxiliary substances, such as wetting or emulsifying agents, preservatives, and pH buffering agents and the like, for example sodium acetate or sorbitan monolaurate.
  • Polynucleotide: A linear nucleotide sequence, including sequences of greater than 100 nucleotide bases in length.
  • Polypeptide: Any chain of amino acids, regardless of length or post-translational modification (e.g., glycosylation or phosphorylation). A “peptide” is a chain of amino acids that is less than 100 amino acids in length. In one embodiment, a “peptide” is a portion of a polypeptide, such as at about 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, or 100 contiguous amino acids of a polypeptide that is greater than 100 amino acids in length.
  • Portion of a nucleic acid sequence: At least 10, 20, 30 or 40 contiguous nucleotides of the relevant sequence, such as a sequence encoding an antigen. In some instances it would be advantageous to use a portion consisting of 50 or more nucleotides. For instance, when describing a portion of an antigen (such as an antigenic epitope), it may be advantageous to remove a portion of the relevant sequence comprising at least 10, 20, 30, 40 or 50 nucleotides up to a length.
  • Probes and primers: Nucleic acid probes and primers may readily be prepared based on the nucleic acids provided by this invention. A probe comprises an isolated nucleic acid attached to a detectable label or reporter molecule. Typical labels include radioactive isotopes, ligands, chemiluminescent agents, and enzymes. Methods for labeling and guidance in the choice of labels appropriate for various purposes are discussed, e.g., in Sambrook et al. (1989) and Ausubel et al. (1987).
  • Primers are short nucleic acids, preferably DNA oligonucleotides 15 nucleotides or more in length. Primers may be annealed to a complementary target DNA strand by nucleic acid hybridization to form a hybrid between the primer and the target DNA strand, and then extended along the target DNA strand by a DNA polymerase enzyme. Primer pairs can be used for amplification of a nucleic acid sequence, e.g., by the polymerase chain reaction (PCR) or other nucleic-acid amplification methods known in the art.
  • Methods for preparing and using probes and primers are described, for example, in Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, 2nd ed., vol. 1-3, ed. Sambrook et al., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., 1989, and Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, ed. Ausubel et al., Greene Publishing and Wiley-Interscience, New York, 1987 (with periodic updates). PCR primer pairs can be derived from a known sequence, for example, by using computer programs intended for that purpose such as Primer (Version 0.5, © 1991, Whitehead Institute for Biomedical Research, Cambridge, Mass.).
  • Preventing or treating a disease: “Preventing” a disease refers to inhibiting the full development of a disease, for example in a person who is known to be at risk of infection with M. tuberculosis, or M. leprae. An example of a person with a known predisposition is someone living with a person diagnosed with tuberculosis, health care professionals, or someone the family, or who has been exposed to M. tuberculosis. “Treatment” refers to a therapeutic intervention that ameliorates a sign or symptom of a disease or pathological condition, such as tuberculosis, after it has begun to develop.
  • Promoter: A promoter is an array of nucleic acid control sequences which direct transcription of a nucleic acid. A promoter includes necessary nucleic acid sequences near the start site of transcription, such as, in the case of a polymerase II type promoter, a TATA element. A promoter also optionally includes distal enhancer or repressor elements which can be located as much as several thousand base pairs from the start site of transcription. The promoter can be a constitutive or an inducible promoter. A specific, non-limiting example of a promoter is the HCMV IE promoter.
  • Purified: The term purified does not require absolute purity; rather, it is intended as a relative term. Thus, for example, a purified antigen preparation is one in which the antigen is more pure than the protein in its originating environment within a cell. A preparation of an antigen is typically purified such that the antigen represents at least 50% of the total protein content of the preparation. However, more highly purified preparations may be required for certain applications. For example, for such applications, preparations in which the antigen comprises at least 75% or at least 90% of the total protein content may be employed.
  • Recombinant: A recombinant nucleic acid or polypeptide is one that has a sequence that is not naturally occurring or has a sequence that is made by an artificial combination of two or more otherwise separated segments of sequence. This artificial combination is often accomplished by chemical synthesis or, more commonly, by the artificial manipulation of isolated segments of nucleic acids, e.g., by genetic engineering techniques.
  • Sequence identity: The similarity between amino acid sequences is expressed in terms of the similarity between the sequences, otherwise referred to as sequence identity. Sequence identity is frequently measured in terms of percentage identity (or similarity or homology); the higher the percentage, the more similar the two sequences are. Variants of antigen polypeptides will possess a relatively high degree of sequence identity when aligned using standard methods.
  • Methods of alignment of sequences for comparison are well known in the art. Altschul et al. (1994) presents a detailed consideration of sequence alignment methods and homology calculations. The NCBI Basic Local Alignment Search Tool (BLAST) (Altschul et al., 1990) is available from several sources, including the National Center for Biotechnology Information (NCBI, Bethesda, Md.) and on the
  • Internet, for use in connection with the sequence analysis programs blastp, blastn, blastx, tblastn and tblastx. It can be accessed at the NCBI website. A description of how to determine sequence identity using this program is available at the NCBI website, as are the default parameters.
  • Variants of antigenic polypeptides, such as a Mycobacterium polypeptide, are typically characterized by possession of at least 50% sequence identity counted over the full length alignment with the amino acid sequence of a native antigen sequence using the NCBI Blast 2.0, gapped blastp set to default parameters. Proteins with even greater similarity to the reference sequences will show increasing percentage identities when assessed by this method, such as at least 60%, at least 65%, at least 70%, at least 75%, at least 80%, at least 90% or at least 95% sequence identity. When less than the entire sequence is being compared for sequence identity, variants will typically possess at least 75% sequence identity over short windows of 10-20 amino acids, and may possess sequence identities of at least 85% or at least 90% or 95% depending on their similarity to the reference sequence. Methods for determining sequence identity over such short windows are described at the NCBI website. Variants of MHC domain polypeptides also retain the biological activity of the native polypeptide. For the purposes of this invention, that activity is conveniently assessed by incorporating the variant domain in the appropriate β1α1 or α1α2 polypeptide and determining the ability of the resulting polypeptide to inhibit antigen specific T-cell proliferation in vitro, or to induce T suppressor cells or the expression of IL-10 as described in detail below.
  • Therapeutically active polypeptide: An agent, such as an epitope of Mtb that causes induction of an immune response, as measured by clinical response (for example increase in a population of immune cells, increased cytolytic activity against Mtb, or measurable reduction of a symptom of an infection). Therapeutically active molecules can also be made from nucleic acids. Examples of a nucleic acid based therapeutically active molecule is a nucleic acid sequence that encodes an Mtb epitope, wherein the nucleic acid sequence is operably linked to a control element such as a promoter.
  • In one embodiment, a therapeutically effective amount of an Mtb polypeptide is an amount used to generate an immune response. In several examples, “treatment” refers to a therapeutic intervention that ameliorates a sign or symptom of tuberculosis.
  • Therapeutically effective dose: A dose sufficient to prevent advancement, or to cause regression of the disease, or which is capable of relieving symptoms caused by the disease. In one embodiment, a therapeutically effective dose is a dose sufficient to prevent advancement or relieve symptoms of tuberculosis.
  • Transduced and Transformed: A virus or vector “transduces” a cell when it transfers nucleic acid into the cell. A cell is “transformed” by a nucleic acid transduced into the cell when the DNA becomes stably replicated by the cell, either by incorporation of the nucleic acid into the cellular genome, or by episomal replication. As used herein, the term transformation encompasses all techniques by which a nucleic acid molecule might be introduced into such a cell, including transfection with viral vectors, transformation with plasmid vectors, and introduction of naked DNA by electroporation, lipofection, and particle gun acceleration.
  • Tuberculosis (TB): A disease that is generally caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis that usually infects the lungs. However, other “atypical” mycobacteria such as M. kansasii may produce a similar clinical and pathologic appearance of disease.
  • Transmission of M. tuberculosis occurs by the airborne route in confined areas with poor ventilation. In more than 90% of cases, following infection with M. tuberculosis, the immune system prevents development of disease from M. tuberculosis, often called, active tuberculosis. However, not all of the M. tuberculosis is killed, and thus tiny, hard capsules are formed. “Primary tuberculosis” is seen disease that develops following an initial infection, usually in children. The initial focus of infection is a small subpleural granuloma accompanied by granulomatous hilar lymph node infection. Together, these make up the Ghon complex. In nearly all cases, these granulomas resolve and there is no further spread of the infection. “Secondary tuberculosis” is seen mostly in adults as a reactivation of previous infection (or reinfection), particularly when health status declines. The granulomatous inflammation is much more florid and widespread. Typically, the upper lung lobes are most affected, and cavitation can occur. Dissemination of tuberculosis outside of lungs can lead to the appearance of a number of uncommon findings with characteristic patterns that include skeletal tuberculosis, genital tract tuberculosis, urinary tract tuberculosis, central nervous system (CNS) tuberculosis, gastrointestinal tuberculosis, adrenal tuberculosis, scrofula, and cardiac tuberculosis.
  • “Latent” tuberculosis is an Mtb infection in an individual that can be detected by a diagnostic assay, such as, but not limited to a tuberculin skin test (TST) wherein the infection does not produce symptoms in that individual. “Active” tuberculosis is a symptomatic Mtb infection in a subject.
  • Microscopically, the inflammation produced with TB infection is granulomatous, with epithelioid macrophages and Langhans giant cells along with lymphocytes, plasma cells, maybe a few polymorphonuclear cells, fibroblasts with collagen, and characteristic caseous necrosis in the center. The inflammatory response is mediated by a type IV hypersensitivity reaction, and skin testing is based on this reaction. In some examples, tuberculosis can be diagnosed by a skin test, an acid fast stain, an auramine stain, or a combination thereof. The most common specimen screened is sputum, but the histologic stains can also be performed on tissues or other body fluids.
  • TB is a frequent complication of HIV infection. TB infection in subjects infected with a human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) can spread readily and progress rapidly to active disease. Specific symptoms of lung disease due to Mtb infection include chronic cough and spitting blood. Other symptoms of TB disease include fatigue, loss of appetite, weight loss, fever and drenching night sweats.
  • Vector: A nucleic acid molecule as introduced into a host cell, thereby producing a transformed host cell. A vector may include nucleic acid sequences that permit it to replicate in a host cell, such as an origin of replication. A vector may also include one or more selectable marker gene and other genetic elements known in the art. Vectors include plasmid vectors, including plasmids for expression in gram negative and gram positive bacterial cell. Exemplary vectors include those for expression in E. coli and Salmonella. Vectors also include viral vectors, such as, but are not limited to, retrovirus, orthopox, avipox, fowlpox, capripox, suipox, adenoviral, herpes virus, alpha virus, baculovirus, Sindbis virus, vaccinia virus and poliovirus vectors. Vectors also include vectors for expression in yeast cells
  • Unless otherwise explained, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which this disclosure belongs. The singular terms “a,” “an,” and “the” include plural referents unless context clearly indicates otherwise. Similarly, the word “or” is intended to include “and” unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. It is further to be understood that all base sizes or amino acid sizes, and all molecular weight or molecular mass values, given for nucleic acids or polypeptides are approximate, and are provided for description. Although methods and materials similar or equivalent to those described herein can be used in the practice or testing of this disclosure, suitable methods and materials are described below. The term “comprises” means “includes.” All publications, patent applications, patents, and other references mentioned herein are incorporated by reference in their entirety. In case of conflict, the present specification, including explanations of terms, will control. In addition, the materials, methods, and examples are illustrative only and not intended to be limiting.
    • Mycobacterium Polypeptides
  • It is disclosed herein that several Mycobacterium polypeptides can be used to induce an immune response to Mtb, such as a T cell response. The Mycobacterium polypeptides can be used in diagnostic assays to identify subjects infected with a Mycobacterium such as Mtb. In several embodiments, the polypeptide comprises or consists of the amino acid sequence set forth as:
      • 1. MX1SRFMTDPHAMRDMAGRFEVHAQTVEDEARRMWASAQNISG AGWSGMAEATSLDTMX2X3MNQAFRNIVNMLHGVRDGLVRDANNY EQQEQASQQILS, (SEQ ID NO: 1, wherein X1 is A or T, X2 is T or A and X3 is any amino acid, such as Q or no amino acid).
        In several examples, the polypeptide comprises or consists of the amino acid sequence set forth as:
      • a. MASRFMTDPHAMRDMAGRFEVHAQTVEDEARRMWASAQNISGA GWSGMAEATSLDTMTQMNQAFRNIVNMLHGVRDGLVRDANNYEQ QEQASQQILS (SEQ ID NO: 2) (See also TUBERCULIST No. Rv1038c, as available on Mar. 1, 2007, incorporated herein by reference, known as EsxJ, ES6—2, TB11.0, QILSS).
      • b. MASRFMTDPHAMRDMAGRFEVHAQTVEDEARRMWASAQNISG AGWSGMAEATSLDTMAQMNQAFRNIVNMLHGVRDGLVRDANNYE QQEQASQQILSS (SEQ ID NO: 3, TUBERCULIST No. Rv1197, as available on Mar. 1, 2007, incorporated herein by reference, also know as EsxK, ES6—3, TB11.0, QILSS).
      • c. MASRFMTDPHAMRDMAGRFEVHAQTVEDEARRMWASAQNISG AGWSGMAEATSLDTMT+MNQAFRNIVNMLHGVRDGLVRDANNYE QQEQASQQILSS (SEQ ID NO: 4, TUBERCULIST No. Rv 1992, as available on Mar. 1, 2007, incorporated herein by reference, as known as EsxM, TB11.0, QILSS.
      • d. MATRFMTDPHAMRDMAGRFEVHAQTVEDEARRMWASAQNISG AGWSGMAEATSLDTMAQMNQAFRNIVNMLHGVRDGLVRDANNYE QQEQASQQILSS (SEQ ID NO: 5, TUBERCULIST No. Rv 2347c, as available on Mar. 1, 2007, incorporated herein by reference, also known as EsxP, ES6—7, QILSS).
      • e. MTSRFMTDPHAMRDMAGRFEVHAQTVEDEARRMWASAQNISG AGWSGMAEATSLDTMTQMNQAFRNIVNMLHGVRDGLVRDANNYE QQEQASQQILSS (SEQ ID NO: 6, TUBERCULIST No. Rv3620c, as available on Mar. 1, 2007, incorporated herein by reference, also known as EsxW, ES6 —10, QILSS).
        In additional embodiments, the polypeptide comprises or consists of the amino acid sequence set forth as:
      • 2. MSYMIATPAALTAAATDIDGIGSAVSVANAAAVAATTGVLAAGG DEVLAAIARLFNANAEEYHALSAQVAAFQTLFVRTLTGGCGVFRRR RGRQCVTAAEHRAAGAGRRQRRRRSGDGQW RLRQQRHFGCGGQPEFRQHSEHRR (SEQ ID NO: 7, TUBERCULIST NO. Rv1088, as available on Mar. 1, 2007, incorporated herein by reference, also known as PE9).
      • 3. VSLVIATPQLLATAALDLASIGSQVSAANAAAAMPTTEVVAAAA DEVSAAIAGLFGAHARQYQALSVQVAAFHEQFVQALTAAAGRYAST EAAVERSLLGAVNAPTEALLGRPLIGNGADGTAPGQPGAAGGLLFG NGGNGAAGGFGQTGGSGGAAGLIGNGGNGGAGGTGAAGGAGGNG GWLWGNGGNGGVGGTSVAAGIGGAGGNGGNAGLFGHGGAGGTG GAGLAGANGVNPTPGPAASTGDSPADVSGIGDQTGGDGGTGGHGTA GTPTGGTGGDGATATAGSGKATGGAGGDGGTAAAGGGGGNGGDG GVAQGDIASAFGGDGGNGSDGVAAGSGGGSGGAGGGAFVHIATAT STGGSGGFGGNGAASAASGADGGAGGAGGNGGAGGLLFGDGGNG GAGGAGGIGGDGATGGPGGSGGNAGIARFDSPDPEAEPDVVGGKGG DGGKGGSGLGVGGAGGTGGAGGNGGAGGLLFGNGGNGGNAGAGG DGGAGVAGGVGGNGGGGGTATFHEDPVAGVWAVGGVGGDGGSG GSSLGVGGVGGAGGVGGKGGASGMLIGNGGNGGSGGVGGAGGVG GAGGDGGNGGSGGNASTFGDENSIGGAGGTGGNGGNGANGGNGG AGGIAGGAGGSGGFLSGAAGVSGADGIGGAGGAGGAG GAGGSGGEAGAGGLTNGPGSPGVSGTEGMAGAPG (SEQ ID NO: 8, TUBERCULIST NO. Rv2487, as available on Mar. 1, 2007, incorporated herein by reference, also known as PE_PGRS42)
      • 4. MHQVDPNLTRRKGRLAALAIAAMASASLVTVAVPATANADPEPA PPVPTTAASPPSTAAAPPAPATPVAPPPPAAANTPNAQPGDPNAAPPP ADPNAPPPPVIAPNAPQPVRIDNPVGGFSFALPAGWVESDAAHFDYG SALLSKTTGDPPFPGQPPPVANDTRIVLGRLDQKLYASAEATDSKAA ARLGSDMGEFYMPYPGTRINQETVSLDANGVSGSASYYEVKFSDPSK PNGQIWTGVIGSPAANAPDAGPPQRWFVVWLGTANNPVDKGAAKA LAESIRPLVAPPPAPAPAPAEP APAPAPAGEVAPTPTTPTPQRTLPA (SEQ ID NO: 9, TUBERCULIST No. Rv1860, as available on Mar. 1, 2007, incorporated herein by reference, also known as Apa, modD, mpt32)
      • 5. MLLALLRQHIRPYRRLVAMLMMLQLVSTLASLYLPTVNAAIVDD GVAKGDTATIVRLGAVMLGVTGLQVLCAIGAVYLGSRTGAGFGRDL RSAMFEHIITFSERETARFGAPTLLTRSTNDVRQILFLVQMTATVLVT APIMCVGGIIMAIHQEAALTWLLLVSVPILAVANYWIISHMLPLFRRM QSLIDGINRVMRDQLSGVRVVRAFTREGYERDKFAQANTALSNAAL SAGNWQALMLPVTTLTINASSVALIWFGGLRIDSGQMQVGSLIAFLS YFAQILMAVLMATMTLAVLPRASVCAERITEVLSTPAALGNPDNPKF PTDGVTGVVRLAGATFTYPGADCPVLQDISLTARPGTTTAIVGSTGS GKSTLVSLICRLYDVTAGAVLVDGIDVREYHTERLWSAIGLVPQRSY LFSGTVADNLRYGGGPDQVVTEQEMWEALRVAAADGFVQTDGLQT RVAQGGVNFSGGQRQRLAIARAVIRRPAIYVFDDAFSALDVHTDAK VHASLRQVSGDATIIVVTQRISNAAQADQVIVVDNGKIVGTGTHETL LADCPTYAEFAASQSLSATVGGVG (SEQ ID NO: 10, TUBERCULIST NO. Rv1273c, as available Mar. 1, 2007, incorporated herein by reference).
      • 6. MSYVIAAPEMLATTAADVDGIGSAIRAASASAAGPTTGLLAAAA DEVSSAAAALFSEYARECQEVLKQAAAFHGEFTRALAAAGAAYAQ AEASNTAAMSGTAGSSGALGSVGMLSGNPLTALMMGGTGEPILSDR VLAIIDSAYIRPIFGPNNPVAQYTPEQWWPFIGNLSLDQSIAQGVTLLN NGINAELQNGHDVVVFGYSQSAAVATNEIRALMALPPGQAPDPSRL AFTLIGNINNPNGGVLERYVGLYLPFLDMSFNGATPPDSPYQTYMYT GQYDGYAHNPQYPLNILSDLNAFMGIRWVHNAYPFTAAEVANAVPL PTSPGYTGNTHYYMFLTQDLPLLQPIRAIPFVGTPIAELIQPDLRVLVD LGYGYGYADVPTPASLFAPINPIAVASALATGTVQGPQAALVSIGLLP QSALPNTYPYLPSANPGLMFNFGQSSVTELSVLSGALGSVARLIPPIA (SEQ ID NO: 11, TUBERCULIST NO. Rv0159c, as available Mar. 1, 2007, incorporated herein by reference, also know as PE3 or PE).
      • 7. MEFPVLPPEINSVLMYSGAGSSPLLAAAAAWDGLAEELGSAAVSF GQVTSGLTAGVWQGAAAAAMAAAAAPYAGWLGSVAAAAEAVAG QARVVVGVFEAALAATVDPALVAANRARLVALAVSNLLGQNTPAIA AAEAEYELMWAADVAAMAGYHSGASAAAAALPAFSPPAQALGGG VGAFLTALFASPAKALSLNAGLGNVGNYNVGLGNVGVFNLGAGNV GGQNLGFGNAGGTNVGFGNLGNGNVGFGNSGLGAGLAGLGNIGLG NAGSSNYGFANLGVGNIGFGNTGTNNVGVGLTGNHLTGIGGLNSGT GNIGLFNSGTGNVGFFNSGTGNFGVFNSGNYNTGVGNAGTASTGLF NAGNFNTGVVNVGSYNTGSFNAGDTNTGGFNPGGVNTGWLNTGNT NTGIANSGNVNTGAFISGNFNNGVLWVGDYQGLFGVSAGSSIPAIPIG LVLNGDIGPITIQPIPILPTIPLSIHQTVNLGPLVVPDIVIPAFGGGIGIPIN IGPLTITPITLFAQQTFVNQLPFPTFSLGKITIPQIQTFDSNGQLVSFIGPI VIDTTIPGPTNPQIDLTIRWDTPPITLFPNGISAPDNPLGLLVSVSISNPG FTIPGFSVPAQPLPLSIDIEGQIDGFSTPPITIDRIPLTVGGGVTIGPITIQG LHIPAAPGVGNTTTAPSSGFFNSGAGGVSGFGNVGAGSSGWWNQAP SALLGAGSGVGNVGTLGSGVLNLGSGISGFYNTSVLPFGTPAAVSGI GNLGQQLSGVSAAGTTLRSMLAGNLGLANVGNFNTGFGNVGDVNL GAANIGGHNLGLGNVGDGNLGLGNIGHGNLGFANLGLTAGAAGVG NVGFGNAGINNYGLANMGVGNIGFANTGTGNIGIGLVGDHRTGIGG LNSGIGNIGLFNSGTGNVGFFNSGTGNFGIGNSGRFNTGIGNSGTAST GLFNAGSFSTGIANTGDYNTGSFNAGDTNTGGFNPGGINTGWFNTGH ANTGLANAGTFGTGAFMTGDYSNGLLWRGGYEGLVGVRVGPTISQF PVTVHAIGGVGPLHVAPVPVPAVHVEITDATVGLGPFTVPPISIPSLP IASITGSVDLAANTISPIRALDPLAGSIGLFLEPFRLSDPFITIDAFQVVA GVLFLENIIVPGLTVSGQILVTPTPIPLTLNLDTTPWTLFPNGFTIPAQT PVTVGMEVANDGFTFFPGGLTFPRASAGVTGLSVGLDAFTLLPDGFT LDTVPATFDGTILIGDIPIPIIDVPAVPGFGNTTTAPSSGFFNTGGGGGS GFANVGAGTSGWWNQGHDVLAGAGSGVANAGTLSSGVLNVGS GISGWYNTSTLGAGTPAVVSGIGNLGQQLSGFLANGTVLNRSPIVNIG WADVGAFNTGLGNVGDLNWGAANIGAQNLGLGNLGSGNVGFGNIG AGNVGFANSGPAVGLAGLGNVGLSNAGSNNWGLANLGVGNIGLAN TGTGNIGIGLVGDYQTGIGGLNSGSGNIGLFNSGTGNVGFFNTGTGNF GLFNSGSFNTGIGNSGTGSTGLFNAGNFNTGIANPGSYNTGSFNVGDT NTGGFNPGDINTGWFNTGIMNTGTRNTGALMSGTDSNGMLWRGDH EGLFGLSYGITIPQFPIRITTTGGIGPIVIPDTTILPPLHLQITGDADYSFT VPDIPIPAIHIGINGVVTVGFTAPEATLLSALKNNGSFISFGPITLSNIDIP PMDFTLGLPVLGPITGQLGPIHLEPIVVAGIGVPLEIEPIPLDAISLSESIP IRIPVDIPASVIDGISMSEVVPIDASVDIPAVTITGTTISAIPLGFDIRTSA GPLNIPIIDIPAAPGFGNSTQMPSSGFFNTGAGGGSGIGNLGAGVSGLL NQAGAGSLVGTLSGLGNAGTLASGVLNSGTAISGLFNVSTLDATTPA VISGFSNLGDHMSGVSIDGLIAILTFPPAESVFDQIIDAAIAELQHLDIG NALALGNVGGVNLGLANVGEFNLGAGNVGNINVGAGNLGGSNLGL GNVGTGNLGFGNIGAGNFGFGNAGLTAGAGGLGNVGLGNAGS GSWGLANVGVGNIGLANTGTGNIGIGLTGDYRTGIGGLNSGTGNLGL FNSGTGNIGFFNTGTGNFGLFNSGSYSTGVGNAGTASTGLFNAGNFN TGLANAGSYNTGSLNVGSFNTGGVNPGTVNTGWFNTGHTNTGLFNT GNVNTGAFNSGSFNNGALWTGDYHGLVGFSFSIDIAGSTLLDLNETL NLGPIHIEQIDIPGMSLFDVHEIVEIGPFTIPQVDVPAIPLEIHESIHMDPI VLVPATTIPAQTRTIPLDIPASPGSTMTLPLISMRFEGEDWILGSTAAIP NFGDPFPAPTQGITIHTGPGPGTTGELKISIPGFEIPQIATTRFLLDVNIS GGLPAFTLFAGGLTIPTNAIPLTIDASGALDPITIFPGGYTIDPLPLHLAL NLTVPDSSIPIIDVPPTPGFGNTTATPSSGFFNSGAGGVSGFGNVGSNL SGWWNQAASALAGSGSGVLNVGTLGSGVLNVGSGVSGIYN TSVLPLGTPAVLSGLGNVGHQLSGVSAAGTALNQIPILNIGLADVGNF NVGFGNVGDVNLGAANLGAQNLGLGNVGTGNLGFANVGHGNIGFG NSGLTAGAAGLGNTGFGNAGSANYGFANQGVRNIGLANTGTGNIGI GLVGDNLTGIGGLNSGAGNIGLFNSGTGNIGITNSGTGNFGIGNSGSF NTGIGNSGTGSTGLFNAGSFNTGVANAGSYNTGSFNAGDTNTGGFNP GTINTGWFNTGHTNTGIANSGNVGTGAFMSGNFSNGLLWRGDHEGL FSLFYSLDVPRITIVDAHLDGGFGPVVLPPIPVPAVNAHLTGNVAMGA FTIPQIDIPALTPNITGSAAFRIVVGSVRIPPVSVIVEQIINASVGAEMRI DPFEMWTQGTNGLGITFYSFGSADGSPYATGPLVFGAGTSD GSHLTISASSGAFTTPQLETGPITLGFQVPGSVNAITLFPGGLTFPATSL LNLDVTAGAGGVDIPAITWPEIAASADGSVYVLASSIPLINIPPTPGIG NSTITPSSGFFNAGAGGGSGFGNFGAGTSGWWNQAHTALAGAGSGF ANVGTLHSGVLNLGSGVSGIYNTSTLGVGTPALVSGLGNVGHQLSG LLSGGSAVNPVTVLNIGLANVGSHNAGFGNVGEVNLGAANLGAHNL GFGNIGAGNLGFGNIGHGNVGVGNSGLTAGVPGLGNVGLGNAGGN NWGLANVGVGNIGLANTGTGNIGIGLTGDYQTGIGGLNSGAGNLGL FNSGAGNVGFFNTGTGNFGLFNSGSFNTGVGNSGTGSTGLFNAGSFN TGVANAGSYNTGSFNVGDTNTGGFNPGSINTGWLNAGNANTGVAN AGNVNTGAFVTGNFSNGILWRGDYQGLAGFAVGYTLPLFPAVGAD VSGGIGPITVLPPIHIPPIPVGFAAVGGIGPIAIPDISVPSIHLGLDPAVHV GSITVNPITVRTPPVLVSYSQGAVTSTSGPTSEIWVKPSFFPGIRIAPSS GGGATSTQGAYFVGPISIPSGTVTFPGFTIPLDPIDIGLPVSLTIPGFTIP GGTLIPTLPLGLALSNGIPPVDIPAIVLDRILLDLHADTTIGPINVPIAGF GGAPGFGNSTTLPSSGFFNTGAGGGSGFSNTGAGMSGLLNAMSDPLL GSASGFANFGTQLSGILNRGAGISGVYNTGALGVVTAAVVSGFGNV GQQLSGLLFTGVGP (SEQ ID NO: 12, TUBERCULIST No. 3350c, as available Mar. 1, 2007, herein incorporated by reference, also known as PPE56 or PPE.
  • In a second embodiment, an Mtb polypeptide of use in the methods disclosed herein has a sequence at least 75%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% homologous to the amino acid sequence set forth in one of SEQ ID NOs: 1-12. For example, the polypeptide can have an amino acid sequence, at least 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% homologous to one of the amino acid sequences set forth in SEQ ID NOs: 1-12. Exemplary sequences can be obtained using computer programs that are readily available on the internet and the amino acid sequences set forth herein. In one example, the polypeptide retains a function of the Mtb protein, such as binding to an antibody that specifically binds the Mtb epitope.
  • Minor modifications of an Mtb polypeptide primary amino acid sequences may result in peptides which have substantially equivalent activity as compared to the unmodified counterpart polypeptide described herein. Such modifications may be deliberate, as by site-directed mutagenesis, or may be spontaneous. All of the polypeptides produced by these modifications are included herein. Thus, a specific, non-limiting example of an Mtb polypeptide is a conservative variant of the Mtb polypeptide. A table of conservative substitutions is provided herein. Substitutions of the amino acids sequence shown in SEQ ID NOs: 1-12 can be made based on this table.
  • Mtb polypeptides are disclosed herein that can be used to detect an immune response to Mtb. These peptides include or consist of at least nine amino acids, such as nine to twenty amino acids consecutive amino acids of an Mtb polypeptide set forth above. Specific, non-limiting examples are twelve, eleven, ten amino acids, or nine consecutive amino acids of one of the Mtb polypeptides set forth above. In these examples, the Mtb polypeptide does not include the full-length amino acid sequences set forth as SEQ ID NOs: 1-12.
  • An isolated polypeptide is disclosed that includes nine to twelve consecutive amino acids from an Mtb polypeptide, wherein the isolated polypeptide comprises the amino acid sequence set forth as QTVEDEARRMW (SEQ ID NO: 13). In some embodiments, the polypeptide is nine, ten or eleven amino acids in length. In additional embodiments, the polypeptide consists of the amino acid sequence set forth as SEQ ID NO: 13. An isolated polypeptide is disclosed that includes nine to twelve consecutive amino acids from an Mtb polypeptide, wherein the isolated polypeptide comprises the amino acid sequence set forth as VSAAIAGLF (SEQ ID NO: 14). In some embodiments, the polypeptide is nine, ten or eleven amino acids in length. In additional embodiments, the polypeptide consists of the amino acid sequence set forth as SEQ ID NO: 14.
  • In several embodiments, the isolated Mtb polypeptide is included in a fusion protein. Thus, the fusion protein can include the Mtb polypeptide (see above) and a second heterologous moiety, such as a myc protein, an enzyme or a carrier (such as a hepatitis carrier protein or bovine serum albumin) covalently linked to the Mtb polypeptide. In several examples, a polypeptide consisting of nine to twelve amino acids of one of the amino acid sequences set forth as SEQ ID NOs: 1-14 that bind MHC class I is covalently linked to a carrier. In additional example, a polypeptide consisting of one of the amino acid sequences set forth as one of SEQ ID NOs: 1-14 is covalently linked to a carrier.
  • In additional examples, the polypeptide can be a fusion protein and can also include heterologous sequences to Mtb (such as amino acid sequences of at least nine amino acids in length that are not included in SEQ ID NO: 1). Thus, in several specific non-limiting examples, the immunogenic peptide is a fusion polypeptide, for example the polypeptide includes six sequential histidine residues, a β-galactosidase amino acid sequence, or an immunoglobulin amino acid sequence. The polypeptide can also be covalently linked to a carrier. In additional embodiments, the protein consists of the Mtb polypeptide.
  • The polypeptide can optionally include repetitions of one or more of the Mtb polypeptides disclosed herein. In one specific, non-limiting example, the polypeptide includes two, three, four, five, or up to ten repetitions of one of the Mtb polypeptides described above. Alternatively, more than one polypeptide can be included in a fusion polypeptide. Thus, in several examples, the polypeptide can include at least two, at least three, at least four, at least five or at least six of the amino acid sequences set forth as SEQ ID NOs: 1-14. A linker sequence can optionally be included between the Mtb polypeptides.
  • The Mtb polypeptides disclosed herein can be chemically synthesized by standard methods, or can be produced recombinantly. An exemplary process for polypeptide production is described in Lu et al., Federation of European Biochemical Societies Letters. 429:31-35, 1998. They can also be isolated by methods including preparative chromatography and immunological separations.
  • If desired, polypeptides can also be chemically synthesized by emerging technologies. One such process is described in W. Lu et al., Federation of European Biochemical Societies Letters. 429:31-35, 1998. Polypeptides can also be produced using molecular genetic techniques, such as by inserting a nucleic acid encoding Mtb or an epitope thereof into an expression vector, introducing the expression vector into a host cell, and isolating the polypeptide (see below).
  • Polynucleotides encoding the Mtb polypeptides disclosed herein are also provided. Exemplary nucleic acid sequences are set forth below:
  • ESXJ (ESAT-6 LIKE PROTEIN 2)
    (SEQ ID NO: 15)
    atggcctcgcgttttatgacggatccgcacgcgatgcgggacatggcgggccgttttgag
    gtgcacgcccagacggtggaggacgaggctcgccggatgtgggcgtccgcgcaaaacatc
    tcgggcgcgggctggagtggcatggccgaggcgacctcgctagacaccatgacccagatg
    aatcaggcgtttcgcaacatcgtgaacatgctgcacggggtgcgtgacgggctggttcgc
    gacgccaacaactacgaacagcaagagcaggcctcccagcagatcctcagcagctga
    ESXK (ESAT-6 LIKE PROTEIN 3)
    (SEQ ID NO: 16)
    atggcctcacgttttatgacggatccgcacgcgatgcgggacatggcgggccgttttgag
    gtgcacgcccagacggtggaggacgaggctcgccggatgtgggcgtccgcgcaaaacatt
    tccggtgcgggctggagtggcatggccgaggcgacctcgctagacaccatggcccagatg
    aatcaggcgtttcgcaacatcgtgaacatgctgcacggggtgcgtgacgggctggttcgc
    gacgccaacaactacgagcagcaagagcaggcctcccagcagatcctcagcagctaa
    ESXM (ESAT-6 LIKE PROTEIN ESXM)
    (SEQ ID NO: 17)
    atggcctcacgttttatgacggatccgcatgcgatgcgggacatggcgggccgttttgag
    gtgcacgcccagacggtggaggacgaggctcgccggatgtgggcgtccgcgcaaaacatt
    tccggtgcgggctggagtggcatggccgaggcgacctcgctagacaccatgacctagatg
    aatcaggcgtttcgcaacatcgtgaacatgctgcacggggtgcgtgacgggctggttcgc
    gacgccaacaactacgaacagcaagagcaggcctcccagcagatcctgagcagctag
    ESXP (ESAT-6 LIKE PROTEIN 7)
    (SEQ ID NO: 18)
    atggcaacacgttttatgacggatccgcacgcgatgcgggacatggcgggccgttttgag
    gtgcacgcccagacggtggaggacgaggctcgccggatgtgggcgtccgcgcaaaacatc
    tcgggcgcgggctggagtggcatggccgaggcgacctcgctagacaccatggcccagatg
    aatcaggcgtttcgcaacatcgtgaacatgctgcacggggtgcgtgacgggctggttcgc
    gacgccaacaactacgagcagcaagagcaggcctcccagcagatcctcagcagctaa
    ESXW (ESAT-6 LIKE PROTEIN 10)
    (SEQ ID NO: 19)
    atgacctcgcgttttatgacggatccgcacgcgatgcgggacatggcgggccgttttgag
    gtgcacgcccagacggtggaggacgaggctcgccggatgtgggcgtccgcgcaaaacatt
    tccggcgcgggctggagtggcatggccgaggcgacctcgctagacaccatgacccagatg
    aatcaggcgtttcgcaacatcgtgaacatgctgcacggggtgcgtgacgggctggttcgc
    gacgccaacaactacgaacagcaagagcaggcctcccagcagatcctcagcagctga
    PE9 (PE FAMILY PROTEIN)
    (SEQ ID NO: 20)
    atgtcatacatgattgccacaccagcggcgttgacggcggcggcaacggatatcgacggg
    attggctcggcggttagcgttgcgaacgccgcggcggtcgccgcgacaaccggagtgctg
    gccgccggtggcgatgaagtgttggcggccatcgctaggctgttcaacgcaaacgccgag
    gaatatcacgccctcagcgcgcaggtggcggcgtttcaaaccctgtttgtgcgcaccttg
    actggggggtgcggagtctttcgccggcgccgaggccgccaatgcgtcacagctgcagag
    catcgcgcggcaggtgcggggcgccgtcaacgccgtcgccggtcaggtgacgggcaatgg
    cggctccggcaacagcggcacttcggctgcggcggccaacccgaattccgacaacacagc
    Gagcatcgccgatag
    PE_PGRS42 (PE-PGRS FAMILY PROTEIN)
    (SEQ ID NO: 21)
    gtgtcgttggtgatcgcgacgccgcagctgctggcaactgcggctttggatttagcgagt
    attggttcgcaggtgagcgcggctaatgcggccgcggcgatgccgacgacggaagtggtg
    gctgcggctgccgatgaagtgtcggcggcgattgcggggttgttcggggcccatgctcgg
    cagtatcaggcgctcagcgtacaggtggcagcgtttcacgagcagtttgtgcaggcgttg
    actgcggccgcgggtcggtatgccagcactgaggccgctgttgagcggagtctgctgggt
    gcggtgaatgcgcccaccgaggcgcttttggggcgcccgttgatcggaaacggcgccgac
    gggacggcacccgggcagcctggcgcggccggcgggttgctgtttggcaacggtggcaac
    ggcgcggctggcgggttcggtcaaaccggcggcagcggaggcgcggccgggttgatcggc
    aacggcggcaacggcggggccggtggtaccggcgcggccggcggtgccggtgggaacggg
    gggtggttgtggggcaacggcggcaacggcggtgtcggcggcaccagcgtggccgcaggc
    atcgggggtgcgggcggtaacggcggcaacgccgggctgttcggccatggcggcgccggt
    ggtaccggcggcgccggcctcgccggggcaaacggggtcaatcccacgcccggccccgcg
    gccagcaccggggacagcccggcagatgtgtccggcatcggtgatcaaaccggcggcgac
    ggcggcacgggcggccatggcactgccggcacgccgaccggtggcaccggcggcgacggt
    gccaccgcgacggcaggctcgggcaaggccaccggcggtgccggtggtgacggcggtacc
    gccgctgccggtggcggcggcggcaacggcggcgacggcggagtcgcgcagggcgacatt
    gcgagcgcctttggcggtgatggtggcaacgggtccgacggtgtagccgccggcagtggg
    ggtggtagcggcggcgccggaggcggcgctttcgtacacatcgccactgccacctctacc
    ggtggtagcggcggtttcggtggtaacggggctgccagtgccgcctccggcgccgacggt
    ggcgcagggggagctggcggcaatggtggcgccggcgggttgctattcggtgatggcggc
    aacggtggcgccggtggcgcgggtggtatcggtggtgacggcgccacgggggggcccggg
    ggaagcggcggcaacgctggcatcgcgaggtttgacagcccagaccccgaggcagaaccc
    gatgtggtcggcggcaagggtggtgatggcggcaagggcggcagcggccttggcgtcggc
    ggcgccggcgggaccggcggcgcgggcggcaacggcggcgccggcgggttgttgttcggc
    aacggcggcaacggcggcaacgccggggccggcggggatggcggcgccggcgttgccggt
    ggggttggcggtaacggcggcggtggtggcaccgcgacgtttcacgaagacccggtcgct
    ggtgtctgggcggtcggtggcgtaggtggtgatggtggctccggcggcagctcgcttggt
    gtcggcggggtgggcggagccggtggcgtgggtggcaagggtggcgccagcggcatgttg
    atcggcaacggcggcaacggtggcagcggcggagtcggtggggccggtggagtcggcggg
    gctggcggtgacggcggcaacggcggctccggtggcaacgccagtacttttggcgatgag
    aactccatcggcggggccggcgggacgggcggcaacgggggcaacggcgcaaacggcggt
    aacggtggcgctggcggtattgccggcggtgcgggtgggtccggagggttcctcagcggt
    gccgcaggagtcagcggcgctgacggtatcggtggcgcgggcggcgcaggcggtgccggt
    ggcgcgggcggtagcggcggtgaggcaggcgcggggggcctcaccaacggccccgggtcc
    cctggcgtttccggcaccgaaggcatggccggcgcgcccggctag
    Rv1860 (FIBRONECTIN ATTACHMENT PROTEIN)
    (SEQ ID NO: 22)
    atgcatcaggtggaccccaacttgacacgtcgcaagggacgattggcggcactggctatc
    gcggcgatggccagcgccagcctggtgaccgttgcggtgcccgcgaccgccaacgccgat
    ccggagccagcgcccccggtacccacaacggccgcctcgccgccgtcgaccgctgcagcg
    ccacccgcaccggcgacacctgttgcccccccaccaccggccgccgccaacacgccgaat
    gcccagccgggcgatcccaacgcagcacctccgccggccgacccgaacgcaccgccgcca
    cctgtcattgccccaaacgcaccccaacctgtccggatcgacaacccggttggaggattc
    agcttcgcgctgcctgctggctgggtggagtctgacgccgcccacttcgactacggttca
    gcactcctcagcaaaaccaccggggacccgccatttcccggacagccgccgccggtggcc
    aatgacacccgtatcgtgctcggccggctagaccaaaagctttacgccagcgccgaagcc
    accgactccaaggccgcggcccggttgggctcggacatgggtgagttctatatgccctac
    ccgggcacccggatcaaccaggaaaccgtctcgctcgacgccaacggggtgtctggaagc
    gcgtcgtattacgaagtcaagttcagcgatccgagtaagccgaacggccagatctggacg
    ggcgtaatcggctcgcccgcggcgaacgcaccggacgccgggccccctcagcgctggttt
    gtggtatggctcgggaccgccaacaacccggtggacaagggcgcggccaaggcgctggcc
    gaatcgatccggcctttggtcgccccgccgccggcgccggcaccggctcctgcagagccc
    gctccggcgccggcgccggccggggaagtcgctcctaccccgacgacaccgacaccgcag
    Cggaccttaccggcctga
    Rv1273c (PROBABLE DRUGS-TRANSPORT TRANSMEMBRANE ATP-BINDING
    PROTEIN ABC TRANSPORTER)
    (SEQ ID NO: 23)
    atgctcctggccctgctgcgccagcacatccgaccgtaccgccggctggtcgcgatgctg
    atgatgctgcagctggtcagcaccctggcttcgctatacctcccgacggtcaacgccgca
    atcgtcgacgacggcgtcgccaagggcgacaccgccaccatcgtacggctgggtgcggtg
    atgcttggggtgaccggattgcaggtgctgtgcgcgatcggggcggtctatctgggctcc
    cggaccggggcgggtttcggccgtgacctgcgctcggcaatgttcgaacacatcatcacc
    ttctcggaacgcgagaccgcccgattcggcgctccgacgttgttgacccgcagcaccaac
    gacgtccggcagatcctgttcctggtccagatgaccgccaccgtgctggtcaccgcaccg
    atcatgtgcgtcggcggaatcatcatggccatccaccaggaggccgcgctgacatggctg
    ctgctggtcagcgttccgattctggccgtagcaaactactggatcatctcccacatgctg
    ccgctcttccgccgcatgcagagcctgatcgacggcatcaaccgggtgatgcgcgatcag
    ctgtccggggtgcgagtggtccgcgccttcacccgcgaaggctatgaacgcgacaagttc
    gcgcaggccaatacggcgctgtcgaatgccgcactgagcgccggcaactggcaagcactg
    atgctgccggtgaccacgctgaccatcaacgcatccagcgtcgcactgatctggttcggt
    gggctacgcatcgacagcggccagatgcaggtcggctccctgatcgccttcctgtcctac
    ttcgcccagatcctgatggcggtgttgatggcgaccatgacgctggccgtgctgccacga
    gcgtcggtctgcgccgaacgcatcaccgaggtgctttccacgcccgccgcactcggtaac
    cccgacaatcccaagttcccgacggacggggtcacgggcgtagtgcgcttggctggcgca
    acctttacctatcctggcgccgactgcccggtgctgcaggacatttcgttgactgcgcgg
    cccggtaccaccaccgcgatcgtcggcagtaccggttcgggcaagtcgacactggtgtcg
    ttgatctgccggctctacgacgtcaccgctggcgcggtcttggttgacggtatcgacgtc
    cgcgagtaccacaccgagcggctctggtcagcgatcgggctggtgccccagcgcagctac
    ctcttctccggaaccgtcgcggacaacctgcgctacggcgggggcccagaccaggtagtc
    accgagcaggagatgtgggaggcgctgcgggtcgccgcggccgacggctttgtacaaaca
    gacgggctgcagacgcgtgtcgcccaaggtggtgtcaacttctccggcgggcagcgccaa
    cggctggcgatagcccgagcggtcatccgacgtccggccatctatgtgttcgacgacgcg
    ttctccgcacttgacgtgcacaccgacgccaaagtccacgcatcgctgcgacaggtatct
    ggtgatgcaaccatcattgttgttacacaacggatttcgaatgccgctcaggccgaccag
    gtcatcgttgtcgataacggtaagatcgtcggcacgggcacccacgaaacgctgctggcc
    gattgccccacctatgccgaattcgccgcctcacaatcgctgagcgccacggtcgggggt
    Gtagggtga
    Rv0159c (PE FAMILY PROTEIN)
    (SEQ ID NO: 24)
    atgtcctacgtcatcgcggccccggagatgttggcaacgacggccgcggacgtggacggg
    atcggttcggcgatacgagcggccagcgcgtccgctgcgggtccaacgaccggactgctg
    gccgcggccgccgatgaggtgtcgtcggccgctgcagcgctgttcagcgaatacgcgcgc
    gaatgtcaagaggtcctaaagcaggctgcggcgttccatggcgagttcacccgggcgctg
    gctgccgccggggccgcctatgcccaggctgaagccagcaacaccgctgctatgtcgggc
    accgccgggtccagcggcgccctcggttctgtcgggatgctgtcaggcaacccgctaacc
    gcgttgatgatgggcggcaccggggaaccgatccttagtgaccgcgtcttggcgatcatt
    gacagcgcatacattcggcccattttcgggcccaacaacccggtcgcccagtacacgccc
    gagcagtggtggccgtttatcgggaacctgtcactggaccaatccatcgcccagggtgtc
    acgctgctgaacaacggcatcaacgcggaactacaaaatgggcatgacgtcgtcgttttc
    ggctactcgcaaagcgccgcggtagcgaccaatgaaatacgcgctcttatggcgttacca
    ccgggccaagccccagatccaagccggctggctttcacgttgatcggtaatatcaataac
    cccaacggcggcgtcctcgagcgttacgtgggcctttacctcccgttcttggatatgtcg
    ttcaacggtgcgactccaccggattccccctaccagacctacatgtacaccggccaatac
    gacggctacgcccacaacccgcagtacccgctcaatatcttgtcggacctcaacgccttc
    atgggcatcagatgggtgcacaacgcgtaccccttcaccgcggccgaggttgccaatgcc
    gtgccgttgcccacgtctccgggctacaccggcaacacccattactacatgtttctgacc
    caggacctgccgctgttgcagccgattcgcgccatccccttcgtagggaccccaatagcc
    gagctgattcagcccgacctacgggtgctagtcgacttgggctatggctacggctacgcc
    gacgtacccaccccggccagcctgttcgcgccaatcaacccgatcgccgtggcctcggcc
    ctggcgaccgggaccgtgcaaggcccccaagccgccctagtaagcatcggattgttaccg
    cagtccgcgctacccaatacgtatccgtatcttccgtcggcgaatccgggcctgatgttc
    aacttcggtcaatccagtgtgacggagttgtcggtgctcagtggcgccctcgggtccgta
    gcgagattgattccaccgatcgcgtga
    Rv3350c (PPE FAMILY PROTEIN)
    (SEQ ID NO: 26)
    atggagtttccggtgttgccaccggaaatcaactccgtgctgatgtattcgggtgcgggg
    tcgagcccgttgctggcggcggccgcggcgtgggatgggctggctgaggagttggggtcg
    gcggcggtgtcgtttgggcaggtgacgtcgggcctgacggcgggggtgtggcagggtgcg
    gcggcggcggcgatggcggccgcggcggcgccgtatgcggggtggttgggttcggtggcg
    gccgcggccgaggcggtggccgggcaggcgcgggtggtggtgggggtctttgaggcggcg
    ttggcggcgacggtggatccggcgctggtggcggccaaccgggcgcggctggtggcgttg
    gcggtgtcgaatctgttggggcagaacacgccggcgatcgcggccgccgaggccgagtac
    gagctgatgtgggccgccgatgtggcggcgatggccggctaccattccggcgcgtcggct
    gctgccgcggcgttgccggcgttcagcccaccggcgcaggcgctggggggaggtgtcggc
    gcgttccttaccgccctgttcgccagccctgcgaaggcgctgagcctgaatgcgggtttg
    ggcaatgtcggcaattacaacgtcgggttgggcaatgtcggggtgttcaacctgggcgcg
    ggcaatgtgggtgggcagaatctgggtttcgggaatgccggtggcaccaatgtcgggttc
    ggcaacctcggtaacgggaatgtcgggttcggcaactccggtctgggggcgggcctggcc
    ggcttgggcaatatcgggttgggcaatgcgggcagcagcaactatggtttcgcaaacctg
    ggtgtgggcaacatcggtttcggcaacaccggcaccaacaacgtcggcgtcgggctcacc
    ggcaaccacctgacgggtatcgggggcctgaattcgggcaccgggaatatcgggttgttc
    aactccggcaccgggaatgtggggttcttcaattcggggaccgggaacttcggggtgttc
    aactcgggtaattacaacaccggtgtcggtaatgcggggacggccagcacggggttgttc
    aatgccggcaatttcaacaccggcgtggtgaacgtgggcagttacaacaccggcagtttc
    aacgccggcgacaccaacaccggtggcttcaaccccggcggtgtgaacaccggctggctg
    aacaccggcaacaccaacaccggcatcgccaactcgggcaacgtcaacaccggcgcgttc
    atctcgggcaacttcaacaacggcgtgctgtgggtgggtgactaccagggcctgttcggc
    gtctccgccggctcgtcgatccccgcaattcccatcggcctggtgctcaacggcgacatc
    ggcccgatcaccatccagcccatcccgatcctgcccaccatcccgctcagcattcaccaa
    accgtcaacttgggcccgctggtggttcccgacatcgtgatccccgccttcggcggcggt
    atcggcatacccatcaacatcggcccgctgaccatcacacccatcaccctgtttgcccaa
    cagacatttgtcaaccaattgccctttcccaccttcagtttagggaaaatcacaattcca
    caaatccaaacctttgattctaacggtcagcttgtcagctttatcggccctatcgttatc
    gacaccaccattcccggacccaccaatccacagattgatttaacgatcagatgggatacc
    cctccgatcacgctgttcccgaatggcatcagtgctcccgataatcctttggggttgctg
    gtgagtgtgtcgatcagtaacccgggctttaccatcccgggatttagtgttcccgcgcag
    ccgttgccgttgtcgatcgatatcgagggccagatcgacgggttcagcaccccgccgatc
    acgatcgatcgcatccccctgaccgtggggggcggggtcacgatcggccccatcacgatc
    cagggccttcatatcccggcggcgccgggagtggggaacaccaccacggccccgtcgtcg
    ggattcttcaactccggtgcgggtggggtgtcgggtttcggcaacgtcggcgcgggcagc
    tcgggctggtggaaccaggcgccgagcgcgctgttgggggccggttcgggtgttggcaac
    gtgggcaccctgggctcgggtgtgctcaacctgggctcagggatctcggggttctacaac
    accagcgtgttgcctttcgggacaccggcggcggtgtcgggcatcggcaacctgggccag
    cagctgtcgggggtgtcggcggcgggaaccacgctgcgctcgatgctcgccggcaacctc
    gggttggccaatgtgggcaacttcaacaccgggttcggaaatgtcggggacgtcaacctg
    ggtgcggccaacatcggtgggcacaacctgggcctgggcaatgtcggggacggcaacctg
    gggttgggcaacatcggccatggcaacctggggtttgccaacttgggcctgaccgccggc
    gcggcgggggtgggcaatgttggttttggcaatgccggcatcaacaactatggcttggcg
    aacatgggtgtgggcaatattgggtttgccaacaccggcacgggcaacatcgggatcggg
    ctggtcggggaccatcggaccgggatcgggggcttgaactccggcatcggcaatatcggg
    ttgttcaactccggcaccggcaacgtcgggttcttcaattccgggaccggcaacttcggc
    atcgggaactccggccgcttcaacaccgggatcggtaatagcggaacggccagcaccggg
    ctcttcaatgccggcagcttcagcaccggcatcgccaacactggtgactacaacacgggc
    agcttcaacgccggcgacaccaacaccggtggcttcaacccgggcggcatcaacaccggc
    tggttcaacaccgggcatgccaacaccgggttggccaacgcgggcaccttcggcaccggc
    gccttcatgacgggcgactacagcaacggcctgttgtggcggggcggctacgagggcctg
    gtcggcgtccgcgtcgggcccacgatctcccaattcccggtcaccgtgcacgcgatcggc
    ggggtgggcccgctgcatgtggcgcccgtcccggtacccgccgtgcacgtcgagatcacc
    gacgccaccgtcggcctgggtccgttcaccgtcccaccgatcagcattccctcacttccc
    atcgccagcatcaccggaagcgtggacctggccgcaaacaccatctcgccgattcgcgct
    cttgacccgctcgccggttcgatagggctttttctcgagccgttccgcctcagtgaccca
    tttatcaccattgatgcgttccaagttgttgccggtgtcttgttcctagagaacatcatt
    gtgcccggcctcacggttagcggtcagatattggtcaccccgacaccaattcccctaacc
    ctcaacttggacaccaccccgtggacgcttttcccgaatggtttcaccattcccgcgcaa
    acccccgtgacggtgggtatggaggtcgccaacgacgggttcaccttcttcccgggtggg
    ctgacctttccgcgggcctccgccggggtcaccggactgtccgtggggctggacgcgttc
    acgctgttgcccgacgggttcaccctcgacaccgtgccggcgaccttcgacggcaccatc
    ctcatcggcgatatcccgatcccgatcatcgatgtgccggcggtgccggggttcggcaac
    accaccacggccccatcgtcggggttcttcaacaccggcggcggcggtggatcggggttc
    gccaacgtcggcgcgggcacgtcgggctggtggaaccaggggcacgacgtgttagcaggg
    gcgggctcgggagttgccaatgccggcacgctgagctcgggcgtgctgaacgtcggctcg
    gggatctccgggtggtacaacaccagcaccctgggagcgggcaccccggcggtggtctcg
    ggcatcggcaacctcggccagcagctgtcggggttcttggcaaatgggaccgtgctcaac
    cggagccccattgtcaatatcgggtgggccgatgtgggcgcgttcaacaccgggttgggc
    aatgtgggggacctcaactggggtgcggccaacatcggcgcgcagaacctgggcctgggc
    aatctcggcagcgggaacgtcgggttcggcaacatcggtgccggcaacgtcgggttcgcc
    aactcgggtccggcggtgggcctggccggcctgggcaacgtggggttgagcaatgccggc
    agcaacaactgggggctggccaacctgggtgtgggcaacatcgggttggccaacaccggc
    acgggcaacatcgggatcgggctggtcggcgactaccagaccggcatcggcggcctcaac
    tcgggtagtggcaatatcggattgttcaattccggcaccggcaatgtcgggttcttcaac
    accggcaccggcaacttcggactgttcaactccggtagtttcaacaccggcatcggtaat
    agcggaaccggcagtactgggctcttcaatgccggcaatttcaacaccggcatcgccaac
    cccgggtcgtacaacacgggcagcttcaatgtcggtgataccaacaccggtggtttcaac
    ccgggcgacatcaacaccggctggttcaacaccggcattatgaatacgggcacccgcaac
    accggcgccctcatgtcggggaccgacagcaacggcatgctgtggcgcggcgaccacgag
    ggcctgttcggcctgtcctatggcatcacgatcccgcaattcccgatccgcatcaccacg
    actggcggtatcggccccatcgtcatcccggacaccacgatccttccgccgctgcacctg
    cagatcaccggcgacgcggactacagcttcaccgtgcccgacatccccatccccgccatc
    cacatcggcatcaatggcgtcgtcaccgtcggcttcaccgccccggaagccaccctgctg
    tccgccctgaagaataacggtagcttcatcagcttcggccccatcacgctctcgaatatc
    gatattccgcccatggatttcacgttaggcctgcccgttcttggtcctatcacgggccaa
    ctcggaccaattcatcttgagccaatcgtggtggccgggatcggtgtgcccctggagatc
    gagcccatccccctggatgcgatttcgttgagtgagtcgattcctatccgcatacctgtt
    gatattccggcctcggtcatcgatgggatttcaatgtcggaagtggtgccgatcgatgcg
    tccgtggacatcccggcggtcacgatcacaggcaccaccatttccgcgatcccgctgggc
    ttcgacattcgcaccagtgccggacccctcaacatcccgatcatcgacatcccggcggcg
    ccgggcttcgggaactcgacccagatgccgtcgtcggggttcttcaacaccggtgccggc
    ggcggatcgggcatcggcaacttgggtgcgggcgtgtcgggcctgctcaaccaggccggc
    gcggggtcactggtggggacactctcggggctgggcaatgccggcaccctggcctcgggt
    gtgctgaactccggcaccgccatctccgggctgttcaacgtgagcacgctggacgccacc
    accccggcggtgatctcggggttcagcaacctcggcgaccatatgtcgggggtgtccatc
    gatggcctgatcgcgatcctcaccttcccacctgccgagtccgtgttcgatcagatcatc
    gacgcggccatcgccgagctgcagcacctcgacatcggcaacgctttggccttgggcaat
    gtcggcggggtgaacctcggtttggctaacgtcggtgagttcaacctgggtgcgggcaac
    gtcggcaacatcaacgtcggcgccggcaacctcggcggcagcaacttggggttgggcaac
    gtcgggaccggcaacctcgggttcggcaacatcggtgccggcaatttcggattcggcaac
    gcgggcctgaccgcgggcgcggggggcctgggcaatgtggggttgggtaacgccggcagc
    ggcagctgggggttggccaacgtgggtgtgggcaatatcgggttggccaacaccggcacc
    ggcaacatcgggatcgggctgaccggggactatcggaccgggatcggcggcctgaactcg
    ggcaccgggaacctcgggttgttcaactcgggcaccggcaacatcgggttcttcaacacc
    gggaccgggaacttcgggctgttcaactcgggcagttacagcaccggtgtggggaatgcg
    ggcacggccagcaccgggttgttcaacgcggggaacttcaacaccggtctggccaatgcc
    ggctcctacaacaccggcagcctcaacgtgggcagcttcaacaccggcggcgtcaacccg
    ggcaccgtcaacaccggctggttcaacaccggccacaccaacaccggcctgttcaacacc
    ggcaacgtcaacaccggcgcgttcaactccggcagcttcaacaacggggcgctgtggacc
    ggtgactaccacgggctggtcggcttctccttcagcatcgacatcgccggcagcaccctg
    ctggacctcaacgaaaccctcaacctgggccccatccacatcgagcagatcgacatcccc
    ggcatgtcgctgttcgacgtccacgaaatcgtcgagatcggacccttcaccatcccgcag
    gtcgatgttcccgcgataccgctagagatccacgaatcgatccacatggatcccatcgtc
    ctggtgcccgccaccacaattcccgcacagacgagaaccattccgctggacatccccgcc
    tcacccgggtcaaccatgacgcttccgctcatcagcatgcgcttcgaaggcgaggactgg
    atcctcgggtcgaccgcggcgattcccaatttcggagaccccttcccggcgcccacccag
    ggcatcaccattcacaccggccctggccccggaacgaccggcgagctcaagatatctatt
    ccgggtttcgagattccgcaaatcgctaccacgagattcctgttggacgtgaacatcagc
    ggtggtctgccggccttcaccttgttcgcgggtggcctgacgatccccacgaacgccatc
    ccgttaacgatcgatgcgtccggcgcgctggatccgatcacgattttcccgggtgggtac
    acgatcgacccgctgccgctgcacctggcgctgaatctcaccgtgcccgacagcagcatc
    ccgatcatcgatgtcccgccgacgccagggttcggcaacaccacggcgaccccgtcgtcg
    gggttcttcaactccggcgccggtggggtgtcggggttcggaaacgtcgggtcgaacctg
    tcgggctggtggaaccaggcggcgagcgcgctggcggggtcgggatcgggggtgttgaat
    gtcggcacgctgggctcgggtgtgctcaacgtcggctcgggtgtctcggggatctacaac
    accagcgtgttgccgctcgggacgccggcggtgctgtcgggcctcggcaacgtcggccat
    cagctgtcgggcgtgtctgcggccgggaccgcgttgaaccagatccccatcctcaacatc
    gggttggcggatgtgggcaacttcaacgtcgggttcggcaacgtcggggacgttaacctg
    ggcgcggccaacctcggtgcgcaaaacctggggctgggcaacgtcggcaccggcaacctc
    ggcttcgccaacgtcggccacggcaatatcggtttcggcaattcgggtctgaccgccggc
    gcggccggcctgggcaacacggggttcggcaatgccggcagcgccaactatggtttcgcc
    aaccagggcgtgcgcaacatcgggttggccaacaccggcaccggcaacatcgggatcggg
    ctggtgggggacaacctcaccggcatcgggggcctgaactccggtgccggcaatatcggc
    ttgttcaactccggcaccggcaacatcgggttcttcaactccgggaccggcaacttcggc
    atcggtaactcgggcagcttcaacaccggcatcggcaatagcggaacgggcagcactggg
    ctcttcaatgccggcagcttcaacaccggcgtggccaacgccggcagctacaacaccggc
    agcttcaatgccggcgacaccaacaccggggggttcaacccgggcaccatcaacaccggc
    tggttcaacaccggccacaccaataccggcatcgccaactcgggcaacgtcggcaccggc
    gcgttcatgtcgggcaacttcagcaacggcctgttgtggcggggtgatcacgagggcctg
    ttcagcctgttctacagcctcgacgtgccccggatcaccatcgtggacgcccacctcgac
    ggcggcttcggacccgtggtcctcccgcccatcccggtgccggccgttaatgcgcacctg
    accggaaacgtcgcgatgggcgcattcaccattccgcagatcgacatccccgcactcacc
    ccaaacatcaccggaagcgccgccttccgcatcgttgtggggtccgtgcgcattccgccg
    gtgagtgtcattgtggagcaaataatcaacgcctcggttggggcggagatgaggatagat
    cccttcgaaatgtggactcaaggcactaatggccttggtataaccttctattcattcgga
    tcggccgacggttcgccctacgccaccggcccactcgttttcggcgccggcacgagcgac
    ggaagccatctcaccatttccgcgtccagcggggcgtttaccactccgcagctcgaaact
    ggcccgatcacgttgggcttccaggtgcccggcagcgtcaacgcgatcaccctcttcccc
    ggtggtttgacgttcccggcgacctcgctgctgaacctggacgtgaccgccggcgccggc
    ggcgtggacatcccggccatcacctggcccgagatcgcggcgagcgccgacggctcggtg
    tatgtcctcgccagcagcatcccgctgatcaacatcccgcccaccccgggcattgggaac
    agcaccatcaccccgtcgtcgggcttcttcaacgccggcgcgggcgggggatcgggcttc
    ggcaacttcggcgcgggcacctcgggctggtggaaccaggcgcacaccgcgctggcgggg
    gcgggctcgggttttgccaacgttggcacgctgcattccggtgtgctcaacctgggctcg
    ggtgtctcggggatctacaacaccagcacgctgggggtggggaccccggcgctggtctca
    ggcctgggcaacgtcggccaccaactgtcggggctgctttccggcgggtccgcggtgaac
    ccggtgaccgttctgaatatcgggttggccaacgtcggcagccacaacgccggtttcggc
    aatgtcggggaggtcaacctgggcgcggccaacctcggcgcgcacaacctgggcttcgga
    aatatcggcgccggcaacctggggttcggcaatattggccacggcaatgtcggagtcggc
    aactcgggtctgaccgcgggcgtgccgggcctgggcaatgtggggttgggcaatgccggc
    ggcaacaactgggggttggccaacgtgggcgtgggcaatatcgggttggccaacaccggc
    accggcaacattgggatcgggctgaccggcgactaccagaccggcatcggcggcctaaat
    tccggtgccggcaacctggggttgttcaactccggcgccggcaacgtcgggttcttcaac
    accgggaccggcaacttcgggttgttcaactccggcagcttcaacaccggcgtcggcaat
    agcggaacgggcagcactgggctcttcaatgccggcagtttcaacaccggtgtggccaac
    gccggcagctacaacacgggcagcttcaatgtcggtgacaccaacaccgggggcttcaac
    ccgggcagcatcaacaccggctggctcaacgccggcaacgccaacaccggggtggccaac
    gcgggcaatgtcaacaccggcgccttcgtcaccggcaacttcagcaacggcatcctgtgg
    cgcggcgactaccagggcctggccggcttcgccgtgggctacaccctcccgctgttcccc
    gcggtgggcgccgacgtcagcggcgggatcggcccgattaccgtgctgccgcccatccac
    atcccgcccattccggtcggcttcgccgcggtcggtggcatcggcccgatcgccatcccg
    gacatctctgttccatccattcacttgggcctcgaccccgccgtccatgtcggctccatc
    accgtcaaccccattaccgtcaggaccccgcccgtgctcgtcagttactcccaaggagcc
    gtcaccagcacgtccggaccaacctcagagatttgggtcaagcccagcttcttccccgga
    atccggatcgcgccctctagcggcgggggtgcaacgtccacgcaaggggcatactttgtg
    gggcccatctccatcccctccggcacggtgaccttcccgggattcaccatccccctcgac
    ccgatcgacatcggcctgccggtgtcgctgaccatcccggggttcaccatcccgggcggc
    accctgatccccaccctcccgctgggcctcgcgttgtccaatggcatcccgcccgtcgac
    atcccggccatcgttctcgaccggatcttgctggacctgcacgccgacaccactatcggc
    ccgatcaacgtcccgatcgccgggttcggcggggcgccgggtttcgggaactcgaccacg
    ctgccgtcgtcgggcttcttcaacaccggagctggcggcggttcgggctttagcaacacc
    ggcgcgggcatgtcgggattgctcaacgcgatgtcggatccgctgctcgggtcggcgtcg
    ggcttcgccaacttcggcacccagctctccggcatcctcaaccgcggcgccggcatctcg
    ggcgtgtacaacaccggcgcgctgggtgttgtcaccgcggccgtcgtctcgggtttcggc
    aacgtcggccagcaactgtcgggcttgctcttcaccggcgtcgggccctaa
  • These polynucleotides include DNA, cDNA and RNA sequences which encode the polypeptide of interest. Silent mutations in the coding sequence result from the degeneracy (i.e., redundancy) of the genetic code, whereby more than one codon can encode the same amino acid residue. Thus, for example, leucine can be encoded by CTT, CTC, CTA, CTG, TTA, or TTG; serine can be encoded by TCT, TCC, TCA, TCG, AGT, or AGC; asparagine can be encoded by AAT or AAC; aspartic acid can be encoded by GAT or GAC; cysteine can be encoded by TGT or TGC; alanine can be encoded by GCT, GCC, GCA, or GCG; glutamine can be encoded by CAA or CAG; tyrosine can be encoded by TAT or TAC; and isoleucine can be encoded by ATT, ATC, or ATA. Tables showing the standard genetic code can be found in various sources (e.g., L. Stryer, 1988, Biochemistry, 3rd Edition, W.H. 5 Freeman and Co., NY).
  • A nucleic acid encoding an Mtb polypeptide can be cloned or amplified by in vitro methods, such as the polymerase chain reaction (PCR), the ligase chain reaction (LCR), the transcription-based amplification system (TAS), the self-sustained sequence replication system (3SR) and the Qβ replicase amplification system (QB). For example, a polynucleotide encoding the protein can be isolated by polymerase chain reaction of cDNA using primers based on the DNA sequence of the molecule. A wide variety of cloning and in vitro amplification methodologies are well known to persons skilled in the art. PCR methods are described in, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 4,683,195; Mullis et al., Cold Spring Harbor Symp. Quant. Biol. 51:263, 1987; and Erlich, ed., PCR Technology, (Stockton Press, NY, 1989). Polynucleotides also can be isolated by screening genomic or cDNA libraries with probes selected from the sequences of the desired polynucleotide under stringent hybridization conditions.
  • The polynucleotides encoding an Mtb polypeptide include a recombinant DNA which is incorporated into a vector into an autonomously replicating plasmid or virus or into the genomic DNA of a prokaryote or eukaryote, or which exists as a separate molecule (such as a cDNA) independent of other sequences. The nucleotides of the invention can be ribonucleotides, deoxyribonucleotides, or modified forms of either nucleotide. The term includes single and double forms of DNA.
  • In one embodiment, vectors are used for expression in yeast such as S. cerevisiae or Kluyveromyces lactis. Several promoters are known to be of use in yeast expression systems such as the constitutive promoters plasma membrane H+-ATPase (PMA1), glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase (GPD), phosphoglycerate kinase-1 (PGK1), alcohol dehydrogenase-1 (ADH1), and pleiotropic drug-resistant pump (PDR5). In addition, may inducible promoters are of use, such as GAL1-10 (induced by galactose), PHO5 (induced by low extracellular inorganic phosphate), and tandem heat shock HSE elements (induced by temperature elevation to 37° C.). Promoters that direct variable expression in response to a titratable inducer include the methionine-responsive MET3 and MET25 promoters and copper-dependent CUP1 promoters. Any of these promoters may be cloned into multicopy (2μ) or single copy (CEN) plasmids to give an additional level of control in expression level. The plasmids can include nutritional markers (such as URA3, ADE3, HIS1, and others) for selection in yeast and antibiotic resistance (AMP) for propagation in bacteria. Plasmids for expression on K. lactis are known, such as pKLAC1. Thus, in one example, after amplification in bacteria, plasmids can be introduced into the corresponding yeast auxotrophs by methods similar to bacterial transformation.
  • The Mtb polypeptides can be expressed in a variety of yeast strains. For example, seven pleiotropic drug-resistant transporters, YOR1, SNQ2, PDR5, YCF1, PDR10, PDR11, and PDR15, together with their activating transcription factors, PDR1 and PDR3, have been simultaneously deleted in yeast host cells, rendering the resultant strain sensitive to drugs. Yeast strains with altered lipid composition of the plasma membrane, such as the erg6 mutant defective in ergosterol biosynthesis, can also be utilized. Proteins that are highly sensitive to proteolysis can be expressed in a yeast lacking the master vacuolar endopeptidase Pep4, which controls the activation of other vacuolar hydrolases. Heterologous expression in strains carrying temperature-sensitive (ts) alleles of genes can be employed if the corresponding null mutant is inviable.
  • Viral vectors can also be prepared encoding the Mtb polypeptides disclosed herein. A number of viral vectors have been constructed, including polyoma, SV40 (Madzak et al., 1992, J. Gen. Virol., 73:15331536), adenovirus (Berkner, 1992, Cur. Top. Microbiol. Immunol., 158:39-6; Berliner et al., 1988, Bio Techniques, 6:616-629; Gorziglia et al., 1992, J. Virol., 66:4407-4412; Quantin et al., 1992, Proc. Nad. Acad. Sci. USA, 89:2581-2584; Rosenfeld et al., 1992, Cell, 68:143-155; Wilkinson et al., 1992, Nucl. Acids Res., 20:2233-2239; Stratford-Perricaudet et al., 1990, Hum. Gene Ther., 1:241-256), vaccinia virus (Mackett et al., 1992, Biotechnology, 24:495-499), adeno-associated virus (Muzyczka, 1992, Curr. Top. Microbiol. Immunol., 158:91-123; On et al., 1990, Gene, 89:279-282), herpes viruses including HSV and EBV (Margolskee, 1992, Cum Top. Microbiol. Immunol., 158:67-90; Johnson et al., 1992, J. Virol., 66:29522965; Fink et al., 1992, Hum. Gene Ther. 3:11-19; Breakfield et al., 1987, Mol. Neurobiol., 1:337-371; Fresse et al., 1990, Biochem. Pharmacol., 40:2189-2199), Sindbis viruses (H. Herweijer et al., 1995, Human Gene Therapy 6:1161-1167; U.S. Pat. No. 5,091,309 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,2217,879), alphaviruses (S. Schlesinger, 1993, Trends Biotechnol. 11:18-22; I. Frolov et al., 1996, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 93:11371-11377) and retroviruses of avian (Brandyopadhyay et al., 1984, Mol. Cell Biol., 4:749-754; Petropouplos et al., 1992, J. Virol., 66:3391-3397), murine (Miller, 1992, Curr. Top. Microbiol. Immunol., 158:1-24; Miller et al., 1985, Mol. Cell Biol., 5:431-437; Sorge et al., 1984, Mol. Cell Biol., 4:1730-1737; Mann et al., 1985, J. Virol., 54:401-407), and human origin (Page et al., 1990, J. Virol., 64:5370-5276; Buchschalcher et al., 1992,
  • J. Virol., 66:2731-2739). Baculovirus (Autographa californica multinuclear polyhedrosis virus; AcMNPV) vectors are also known in the art, and may be obtained from commercial sources (such as PharMingen, San Diego, Calif.; Protein Sciences Corp., Meriden, Conn.; Stratagene, La Jolla, Calif.).
  • Viral vectors, such as poxviral vectors, that encode an Mtb polypeptide include at least one expression control element operationally linked to the nucleic acid sequence encoding the Mtb polypeptide. The expression control elements are inserted in the viral vector to control and regulate the expression of the nucleic acid sequence. Examples of expression control elements of use in these vectors includes, but is not limited to, lac system, operator and promoter regions of phage lambda, yeast promoters and promoters derived from polyoma, adenovirus, retrovirus or SV40. Additional operational elements include, but are not limited to, leader sequence, termination codons, polyadenylation signals and any other sequences necessary for the appropriate transcription and subsequent translation of the nucleic acid sequence encoding the Mtb polypeptide in the host system. The expression vector can contain additional elements necessary for the transfer and subsequent replication of the expression vector containing the nucleic acid sequence in the host system. Examples of such elements include, but are not limited to, origins of replication and selectable markers. It will further be understood by one skilled in the art that such vectors are easily constructed using conventional methods (Ausubel et al., (1987) in “Current Protocols in Molecular Biology,” John Wiley and Sons, New York, N.Y.) and are commercially available.
  • DNA sequences encoding an Mtb polypeptide can be expressed in vitro by DNA transfer into a suitable host cell. The cell may be prokaryotic or eukaryotic. The term also includes any progeny of the subject host cell. It is understood that all progeny may not be identical to the parental cell since there may be mutations that occur during replication. Methods of stable transfer, meaning that the foreign DNA is continuously maintained in the host, are known in the art.
  • As noted above, a polynucleotide sequence encoding an Mtb polypeptide can be operatively linked to expression control sequences. An expression control sequence operatively linked to a coding sequence is ligated such that expression of the coding sequence is achieved under conditions compatible with the expression control sequences. The expression control sequences include, but are not limited to, appropriate promoters, enhancers, transcription terminators, a start codon (i.e., ATG) in front of a protein-encoding gene, splicing signal for introns, maintenance of the correct reading frame of that gene to permit proper translation of mRNA, and stop codons.
  • Hosts cells can include microbial, yeast, insect and mammalian host cells. Methods of expressing DNA sequences having eukaryotic or viral sequences in prokaryotes are well known in the art. Non-limiting examples of suitable host cells include bacteria, archea, insect, fungi (for example, yeast), mycobacterium (such as M. smegmatis), plant, and animal cells (for example, mammalian cells, such as human). Exemplary cells of use include Escherichia coli, Bacillus subtilis, Saccharomyces cerevisiae, Salmonella typhimurium, SF9 cells, C129 cells, 293 cells, Neurospora, and immortalized mammalian myeloid and lymphoid cell lines. Techniques for the propagation of mammalian cells in culture are well-known (see, Jakoby and Pastan (eds), 1979, Cell Culture. Methods in Enzymology, volume 58, Academic Press, Inc., Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, N.Y.). Examples of commonly used mammalian host cell lines are VERO and HeLa cells, CHO cells, and WI38, BHK, and COS cell lines, although cell lines may be used, such as cells designed to provide higher expression desirable glycosylation patterns, or other features. As discussed above, techniques for the transformation of yeast cells, such as polyethylene glycol transformation, protoplast transformation and gene guns are also known in the art (see Gietz and Woods Methods in Enzymology 350: 87-96, 2002).
  • Transformation of a host cell with recombinant DNA can be carried out by conventional techniques as are well known to those skilled in the art. Where the host is prokaryotic, such as, but not limited to, E. coli, competent cells which are capable of DNA uptake can be prepared from cells harvested after exponential growth phase and subsequently treated by the CaCl2 method using procedures well known in the art. Alternatively, MgCl2 or RbCl can be used. Transformation can also be performed after forming a protoplast of the host cell if desired, or by electroporation.
  • When the host is a eukaryote, such methods of transfection of DNA as calcium phosphate coprecipitates, conventional mechanical procedures such as microinjection, electroporation, insertion of a plasmid encased in liposomes, or virus vectors can be used. Eukaryotic cells can also be co-transformed with polynucleotide sequences encoding an Mtb polypeptide, and a second foreign DNA molecule encoding a selectable phenotype, such as the herpes simplex thymidine kinase gene. Another method is to use a eukaryotic viral vector, such as simian virus 40 (SV40) or bovine papilloma virus, to transiently infect or transform eukaryotic cells and express the protein (see for example, Eukaryotic Viral Vectors, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Gluzman ed., 1982).
    • Method for Detecting an Mtb Infection: Detection of T Cells
  • Methods for detection of a Mycobacterium infection in a subject are disclosed herein. In several embodiments, a Mycobacterium infection can be detected based on the presence of T cells in a biological sample, wherein the T cells specifically react with a Mtb polypeptide disclosed herein (see above).
  • In several embodiments, a biological sample comprising T cells is obtained from s subject of interest. Suitable biological samples include, but are not limited to, blood samples, peripheral blood mononuclear cells, sputum, saliva, cerebral spinal fluid or samples of isolated T cells (such as CD8+ T cells and/or CD4+ T cells), lymph node tissue, lung tissue, or other tissue sample. In one example, the sample is incubated with a Mycobacterium polypeptide, as disclosed herein, a polynucleotide encoding the Mtb polypeptide and an APC that expresses the Mtb polypeptide or a fragment thereof that binds MHC. The presence or absence of specific activation of the T cells is detected.
  • The CD8+ T cells and/or CD4+ T cells which recognize the peptide in the detection method have generally been presensitized in vivo to the Mtb polypeptide of interest. In several embodiments, these antigen-experienced T cells are generally present in the peripheral blood of a host which has been exposed to the antigen at a frequency of 1 to 106 to 1 in 103 peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs).
  • In one example, the sample is isolated T cells. For example, T cells can be isolated from a subject of interest by routine techniques (such as by Ficoll/Hypaque density gradient centrifugation of peripheral blood lymphocytes, or by fluorescence activated cell sorting). In one embodiment the T cells used in the assay are in the form of unprocessed or diluted samples, or are freshly isolated T cells (such as in the form of freshly isolated mononuclear cells (MCs) or peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs) which are used directly ex vivo, such that they are not cultured before being used in the method. However the T cells can be cultured before use, for example in the presence of one or more of the peptides, and generally also exogenous growth promoting cytokines. During culturing the peptides are typically presented on the surface of cells such as APCs. Pre-culturing of the T cells may lead to an increase in the sensitivity of the method. Thus the T cells can be converted into cell lines, such as short term cell lines.
  • In several embodiments, the T cells are incubated in vitro for two to nine days, such as about four days, at 37° C. with an Mtb polypeptide or fragment thereof that binds MHC. In several examples, the Mtb polypeptide or fragment thereof that binds MHC is included (at a concentration of, for example, about 5 to about 25 μg/ml, such as about 5, about 10, about 15, or about 20 μg/ml). In several examples, another aliquot of a T cell sample can be incubated in the absence of the Mtb polypeptide as a control.
  • In one embodiment, mononuclear cells (MCs) are separated from the sample. The MCs include the T cells and antigen presenting cells (APCs). Thus in the method the APCs present in the separated MCs can present the peptide to the T cells. In another embodiment only T cells, such as only CD8+ T cells, only CD4+ T cells, or only CD3+ T cells, can be purified from the sample.
  • The APC used in the method may be any cell which has MHC class I molecules on its surface. It may or may not be a specialized antigen presenting cell, such as a B cell, dendritic cell or macrophage. The APC used in the method may be from the same host as the T cell. Generally, the APC is capable of presenting the peptide to a T cell. The APC can be a freshly isolated ex vivo cell or a cultured cell such as a cell from of a cell line.
  • T cells derived from the sample from the subject of interest can be placed into an assay with all the Mtb polypeptides (or a pool of the Mtb polypeptides, or a specific Mtb polypeptide) which it is intended to test the relevant panel or the T cells can be divided and placed into separate assays each of which contain one or more of the peptides. In one embodiment, one or more of the polypeptides with an amino acid sequence set forth as SEQ ID NOs: 1-12, or a fragment of one or more of these polypeptides that bind MHC, is utilized. Two or more of any of the Mtb peptides disclosed herein can be used for simultaneous, separate or sequential use of T cells that recognize these polypeptides. Additional combinations of any of the Mtb polypeptides disclosed herein can be utilized.
  • In one embodiment the one or more peptide(s) is (are) provided to the presenting cell in the absence of the T cell. This cell is then provided to T cells isolated from the subject, typically after being allowed to present the peptide on its surface.
  • The duration for which the peptide is contacted with the cells will vary depending on the method used for determining recognition of the peptide. Typically 105 to 107, such as 5×105 to 106 PBMCs are added to each assay. In the case where peptide is added directly to the assay its concentration is typically from 10−1 to 103 μg/ml, such as about 0.5 to about 50 μg/ml or about 1 to about 10 μg/ml. The length of time for which the T cells are incubated with the peptide can be from about 4 to about 24 hours, such as from about 6 to about 16 hours, or for about 12 hours.
  • The determination of the specific recognition of the peptide by the T cells can be done by measuring the binding of the peptide to the T cells. Typically T cells which bind the peptide can be sorted based on this binding, for example using a fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS) technique. The detection of the presence of T cells which recognize the peptide will be deemed to occur if the frequency of cells sorted using the peptide is above a control value.
  • Determination of whether the T cells recognize the peptide can also be done by detecting a change in the state of the T cells in the presence of the peptide or determining whether the T cells bind the peptide. The change in state is generally caused by antigen specific functional activity of the T cell after the T cell receptor binds the peptide. Generally when binding the T cell receptor the peptide is bound to an MHC class I molecule, which may be present on the surface of a PBMC or an antigen presenting cell (APC).
  • T cell activation can be detected by any means known to one of skill in the art. In one example, CD8+ T cell activation is detected by evaluating cytolytic activity. In another example, CD8+ T cell activation and/or CD4+ T cell activation is detected by proliferation. In several examples, a level of proliferation that is at least two fold greater and/or a level of cytolytic activity that is at least 20% greater than in uninfected subjects indicates the presence of a Mycobacterium infection in the subject of interest.
  • The change in state of the T cell may be the start of or increase in secretion of a substance from the T cell, such as a cytokine, such as interferon (IFN)-γ, IL-2 or TNF-α. In one example, the substance can be detected by allowing it to bind to a specific binding agent and then measuring the presence of the specific binding agent/substance complex. The specific binding agent is typically an antibody, such as polyclonal or monoclonal antibodies that binds the substance, such as the cytokine. Antibodies to cytokines are commercially available, or can be made using standard techniques.
  • Typically the specific binding agent such as the antibody is immobilized on a solid support. After the cytokine is allowed to bind the solid support can optionally be washed to remove material which is not specifically bound to the antibody. The antibody/cytokine complex can be detected by using a second binding agent which will bind the complex, such as an antibody that is labeled (either directly or indirectly) with a label. Generally, the second agent binds the substance at a site which is different from the site which binds the first agent.
  • In several examples, the second binding agent can be detected by a third agent which is labeled directly or indirectly by a detectable label. For example the second agent may include a biotin, allowing detection by a third agent which comprises a strepavidin and a label, such as an enzymatic, radioactive or fluorescent label.
  • In one embodiment the detection system is an ELISPOT assay, such as the assay described in PCT Publication No. WO 98/23960, incorporated herein by reference. In one example, IFN-γ secreted from the T cell is bound by a first IFNγ specific antibody which is immobilized on a solid support. The bound IFN-γ is then detected using a second IFN-γ specific antibody which is labeled with a detectable label. Exemplary labeled antibodies are commercially available, such as from MABTECH™ (Stockholm, Sweden). An exemplary ELISPOT assay is described in the Examples section below.
  • The change in state of the T cell also can be measured may be the increase in the uptake of substances by the T cell, such as the uptake of thymidine. The change in state can also be measured by an increase in the size of the T cells, or proliferation of the T cells, or a change in cell surface markers on the T cell.
  • Reagents are provided herein for the detection of CD8 expressing cells (CD8+) that specifically bind an Mtb polypeptide as disclosed herein. These reagents are tetrameric MHC Class I/immunogenic TARP polypeptide complexes.
  • These tetrameric complexes include an Mtb polypeptide, such as a polypeptide of nine to twenty amino acids in length that specifically binds MHC class I.
  • Tetrameric MHC Class I/peptide complexes can be synthesized using methods well known in the art (Altmann et al., Science 274:94, 1996, which is herein incorporated by reference). In one specific non-limiting example, purified HLA heavy chain polypeptide and β2-microglobulin (β2m) can be synthesized by means of a prokaryotic expression system. One specific, non-limiting example of an expression system of use is the pET system (R&D Systems, Minneapolis, Minn.). The heavy chain is modified by deletion of the trans-membrane and cytosolic tail and COOH-terminal addition of a sequence containing the biotin protein ligase (Bir-A) enzymatic biotinylation site. Heavy chain, β2m, and peptide are then refolded. The refolded product can be isolated by any means known in the art, and then biotinylated by Bir-A. A tetramer is then produced by contacting the biotinylated product with strepavidin.
  • In one embodiment, the strepavidin is labeled. Suitable labels include, but are not limited to, enzymes, magnetic beads, colloidal magnetic beads, haptens, fluorochromes, metal compounds, radioactive compounds or drugs. The enzymes that can be conjugated to strepavidin include, but are not limited to, alkaline phosphatase, peroxidase, urease and B-galactosidase. The fluorochromes that can be conjugated to the strepavidin include, but are not limited to, fluorescein isothiocyanate, tetramethylrhodamine isothiocyanate, phycoerythrin, allophycocyanins and Texas Red. For additional fluorochromes that can be conjugated to strepavidin, see Haugland, R. P., Molecular Probes: Handbook of Fluorescent Probes and Research Chemicals (1992-1994). The metal compounds that can be conjugated to the strepavidin include, but are not limited to, ferritin, colloidal gold, and particularly, colloidal superparamagnetic beads. The haptens that can be conjugated to the strepavidin include, but are not limited to, biotin, digoxigenin, oxazalone, and nitrophenol. The radioactive compounds that can be conjugated to strepavidin are known to the art, and include but are not limited to technetium 99m (99Tc), 125I and amino acids comprising any radionuclides, including, but not limited to, 14C, 3H and 35S. Generally, strepavidin labeled with a fluorochrome is utilized in the methods disclosed herein.
  • In one embodiment, suspension of cells including T cells that specifically recognize an Mtb polypeptide is produced, and the cells are reacted with the tetramer in suspension. In one embodiment, these reagents are used to label cells, which are then analyzed by fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS). A machine for FACS employs a plurality of color channels, low angle and obtuse light-scattering detection channels, and impedance channels, among other more sophisticated levels of detection, to separate or sort cells. Any FACS technique can be employed as long as it is not detrimental to the detection of the desired cells. (For exemplary methods of FACS see U.S. Pat. No. 5,061,620, incorporated herein by reference).
    • Method for Detecting an Mtb Infection: Skin Tests
  • In another aspect, this invention provides methods for using one or more of the polypeptides described above to diagnose Mycobacterium infection, and in particular tuberculosis, using a skin test. A “skin test” is any assay performed directly on a patient in which a delayed-type hypersensitivity (DTH) reaction (such as induration, swelling, reddening or dermatitis) is measured following administration into the skin, such as the intradermal injection of one or more polypeptides described above. Such injection can be achieved using any suitable device sufficient to contact the polypeptide or polypeptides with dermal cells of the patient, such as a tuberculin syringe or 1 ml syringe. In several examples, the reaction is measured at least 48 hours after injection, such as between about 48 and about 72 hours after injection.
  • A DTH reaction is a cell-mediated immune response which is greater in subjects that have been exposed previously to the test antigen (the Mtb polypeptide, fragment thereof that binds MHC, or fusion protein thereof). The response can be measured visually, such as using a ruler. In several examples, a response that is greater than about 0.5 cm in diameter, such as greater than about 1.0 cm in diameter, is a positive response, and is indicative of Mycobacterium infection.
  • The Mtb polypeptides disclosed herein can be formulated for use in a skin test as pharmaceutical compositions containing a polypeptide and a physiologically acceptable carrier. These compositions typically contain one or more of the disclosed Mtb polypeptides (or a fragment thereof that binds MHC or a fusion protein thereof) in an amount ranging from about 1 μg to about 100 μg, such as from about 10 μg to about 50 μg in a volume of 0.1 ml. The carrier employed in a pharmaceutical composition can be a saline solution with appropriate preservatives, such as phenol and/or TWEEN80™.
  • Generally, the polypeptide employed in a skin test is of sufficient size such that it remains at the site of injection for the duration of the reaction period. In several examples, a polypeptide that is at least nine amino acids in length is sufficient. Without being bound by theory, the polypeptide is broken down by macrophages within hours of injection to allow presentation to T-cells. Such polypeptides can contain repeats of one or more of the above disclosed sequences and/or other immunogenic or non-immunogenic sequences.
  • Thus, the determination of the recognition of the peptide by the T cells can be measured in vivo. In several examples, the peptide is administered to the individual and then a response which indicates recognition of the peptide may be measured. In one embodiment the peptide is administered intradermally, typically in a similar manner to the Mantoux test. The peptide can be administered epidermally. The peptide is typically administered by needle, such as by injection, but can be administered by other methods such as ballistics, for example the ballistics techniques which have been used to deliver nucleic acids. Published EPC Application No. EP-A-0693119 describes techniques which can typically be used to administer the peptide. In several examples, from 0.001 to 1000 μg, for example from 0.01 to 100 μg or 0.1 to 10 μg of peptide is administered. Alternatively an agent can be administered which is capable of providing the peptides in vivo. Thus a polynucleotide capable of expressing the polypeptide can be administered. The polynucleotide typically has any of the characteristics of the polynucleotide which is discussed below. Polypeptide is expressed from the polynucleotide in vivo and recognition of the peptide in vivo may be measured. Typically from 0.001 to 1000 μg, for example from 0.01 to 100 μg or 0.1 to 10 μg of polynucleotide is administered.
    • Method for Detecting an Mtb Infection: Detection of Antibodies
  • Methods are disclosed herein wherein the polypeptides described above are used to diagnose Mycobacterium infection, and in particular tuberculosis. In these embodiments, methods are provided for detecting Mycobacterium infection in a biological sample, using one or more of the above polypeptides, alone or in combination. In several embodiments in multiple polypeptides are employed. The polypeptide(s) are used in an assay to determine the presence or absence of antibodies to the polypeptide(s) in a biological sample (such as, but not limited to, whole blood, sputum, serum, plasma, saliva, or cerebrospinal fluid) relative to a control. The presence of such antibodies indicates previous sensitization to mycobacterial antigens which may be indicative of Mycobacterium infection, and in particular tuberculosis.
  • In embodiments in which more than one polypeptide is employed, the polypeptides can be complementary, such that one component polypeptide will detect infection in samples where the infection would not be detected by another component polypeptide). Complementary polypeptides may generally be identified by using each polypeptide individually to evaluate serum samples obtained from a series of patients known to be infected with Mycobacterium. After determining which samples are correctly identified as positive with each polypeptide, combinations of two or more polypeptides may be formulated that are capable of detecting infection in most, or all, of the samples tested. Complementary polypeptides are of use to improve sensitivity of a diagnostic test. Thus, more than one of the above-described Mtb polypeptides can be included in an assay. Additional polypeptides from Mtb (those not described herein) optionally can be included in the assay.
  • There are a variety of assay formats that can be used to detect antibodies in a sample (see, for example, Harlow and Lane, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory (1988), which is incorporated herein by reference). In general, the presence or absence of an Mtb infection in a patient may be determined by (a) contacting a biological sample obtained from a patient with one or more Mtb polypeptides; (b) detecting in the sample the presence (or absence) of an antibody that binds to the polypeptide(s); and (c) comparing the level of antibody with a control. The control can be a standard value, such as a pre-determined cut-off value. The control can be the amount of antibodies in a subject known to be infected with Mtb, or the amount of antibodies that specifically bind the polypeptide(s) in a subject known not to be infected with Mtb.
  • In several embodiments, the assay involves the use of a polypeptide immobilized on a solid support. Antibodies that specifically bind the polypeptide(s) of interest bind to the solid support. The bound antibody can then be detected using a detection reagent that includes a detectable label. Suitable detection reagents include labeled antibodies that bind to the antibody/polypeptide complex. Suitable detection reagents also include second unlabeled antibodies that bind to the antibody polypeptide complex and a third antibody that specifically binds the second antibody. Suitable detection reagents also include unbound polypeptide labeled with a reporter group (such as in a semi-competitive assay).
  • Alternatively, a competitive assay may be utilized, in which an antibody that binds to the polypeptide of interest is labeled with a reporter group is incubated with the sample. Following incubation, the antibody is then allowed to bind to the immobilized antigen after incubation of the antigen with the sample. The extent to which components of the sample inhibit the binding of the labeled antibody to the immobilized polypeptide is indicative of the reactivity of the sample with the immobilized polypeptide.
  • A solid support used in an assay disclosed herein can be any solid material to which the antigen may be attached. For example, the solid support can be a test well in a microtiter plate or a nitrocellulose or other suitable membrane. Alternatively, the solid support may be a bead or disc, such as glass, fiberglass, latex or a plastic material such as polystyrene or polyvinylchloride. The support can also be a magnetic particle or a fiber optic sensor, such as those disclosed, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 5,359,681.
  • The polypeptides can be bound to the solid support using a variety of techniques. The binding of the polypeptides can be accomplished by a noncovalent association, such as adsorption, or covalent attachment, such as a direct linkage between the antigen and functional groups on the support or a linkage through a cross-linking agent.
  • For binding by adsorption, binding can be achieved by contacting one or more Mtb polypeptide(s) (generally in a buffer) with the solid support for a suitable amount of time. The contact time for binding is typically between about 1 hour and 1 day. In general, binding is achieved by contacting a polystyrene or polyvinylchloride solid support with an amount of the one or more Mtb polypeptide(s) ranging from about 10 ng to about 1 μg, such as about 100 ng of antigen.
  • Covalent attachment of the Mtb polypeptide(s) of interest to a solid support can generally be achieved by reacting the support with a bifunctional reagent that reacts with both the support and a functional group, such as a hydroxyl or amino group, on the polypeptide. For example, an Mtb polypeptide can be bound to supports having an appropriate polymer coating using benzoquinone or by condensation of an aldehyde group on the support with an amine and an active hydrogen on the polypeptide (Pierce Immunotechnology Catalog and Handbook, at A12 A13, 1991).
  • In certain embodiments, the assay is an enzyme linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA). This assay can be performed by first contacting a polypeptide antigen that has been immobilized on a solid support (such as in the well of a microtiter plate) with the sample in a manner such that that antibodies present within the sample that specifically bind the polypeptide of interest bind the immobilized polypeptide. Unbound sample is then removed and a detection reagent capable of binding to the immobilized antibody-polypeptide complex is added. The amount of detection reagent that remains bound is determined using a method appropriate for the specific detection reagent. For example, the detection method can detect fluorescence or the presence of an enzymatic activity.
  • In some embodiments, the polypeptide is immobilized on the support; any remaining protein binding sites on the support are typically blocked. Any suitable blocking agent can be used to block the unbound protein binding sites, such as bovine serum albumin or TWEEN 20™ can be employed. The immobilized polypeptide is then incubated with the sample, and the antibody is allowed to bind to the antigen. The sample can be diluted with a suitable diluent, for example a buffer such as phosphate-buffered saline (PBS) prior to incubation. In general, an appropriate contact time (incubation time) is a period of time that is sufficient to detect the presence of antibody in a Mycobacterium-infected sample. In one specific, non-limiting example, the contact time is sufficient to achieve a level of binding that is at least 95% of that achieved at equilibrium between bound and unbound antibody. The time necessary to achieve equilibrium can be determined by assaying the level of binding that occurs over a period of time. At room temperature, an incubation time of about 30 minutes is generally sufficient.
  • Unbound sample can then be removed by washing the solid support with an appropriate buffer, such as PBS containing 0.1% TWEEN 20™. A detection reagent can then be added to the solid support. A detection reagent can be any compound that binds to the immobilized antibody-polypeptide complex and can be detected. In several embodiments, the detection reagent contains a binding agent (such as, for example, Protein A, Protein G, immunoglobulin, lectin or free antigen) conjugated to a label. Labels of use include enzymes (such as horseradish peroxidase), substrates, cofactors, inhibitors, dyes, radionuclides, luminescent groups, fluorescent groups and biotin. The conjugation of a binding agent to a label can be achieved using methods known in the art; conjugated binding agents are also commercially available (such as from Zymed Laboratories, San Francisco, Calif., and Pierce, Rockford, Ill.).
  • The detection reagent is incubated with the immobilized antibody-polypeptide complex for an amount of time sufficient to detect the bound antibody. An appropriate amount of time may generally be determined from the manufacturer's instructions or by assaying the level of binding that occurs over a period of time. Unbound detection reagent is then removed and bound detection reagent is detected using the label. For radioactive labels, scintillation counting or autoradiographic methods can be used for detection. Spectroscopic methods may be used to detect dyes, luminescent groups and fluorescent groups used as labels. Biotin can be detected using avidin coupled to a different label, such as a radioactive label, fluorescent label or an enzymatic label. Enzymatic labels can be detected by the addition of substrate (generally for a specific period of time), followed by spectroscopic or other analysis of the reaction products.
  • To determine the presence or absence of anti-Mycobacterium antibodies in the sample, the signal detected from the label that bound to the solid support is generally compared to a control. In one embodiment, the control is a standard value, such as the average mean signal obtained when the immobilized antigen is incubated with samples from an uninfected patient. In general, a sample generating a signal that is two or three standard deviations above the control is considered positive for Mycobacterium infection. In another embodiment, the control value is determined using a Receiver Operator Curve, according to the method of Sackett et al., Clinical Epidemiology: A Basic Science for Clinical Medicine, Little Brown and Co., pp. 106 107 (1985). Briefly, in this embodiment, the control value is determined from a plot of pairs of true positive rates (sensitivity) and false positive rates (100% specificity) that correspond to each possible control value for the diagnostic test result. The control value on the plot that encloses the largest area is the most accurate cut-off value, and a sample generating a signal that is higher than the cut-off value determined by this method is considered positive. Alternatively, the cut-off value may be shifted to minimize the false positive rate, or to minimize the false negative rate. In general, a sample generating a signal that is higher than the cut-off value determined by this method is considered positive for tuberculosis.
  • In a related embodiment, the assay is performed in a rapid flow-through or strip test format, wherein the antigen is immobilized on a membrane, such as, but not limited to, nitrocellulose. In a flow-through test, antibodies within the sample bind to the immobilized polypeptide as the sample passes through the membrane. A detection reagent (for example, protein A-colloidal gold) binds to the antibody-polypeptide complex as the solution containing the detection reagent flows through the membrane. The detection of bound detection reagent can be performed as described above.
  • In one example of the strip test format, one end of the membrane to which the polypeptide is bound is immersed in a solution containing the sample. The sample migrates along the membrane through a region containing the detection reagent and to the area of immobilized polypeptide. The concentration of the detection reagent at the polypeptide indicates the presence of anti-Mycobacterium antibodies in the sample. Typically, the concentration of detection reagent at that site generates a pattern, such as a line, that can be read visually. The absence of such a pattern indicates a negative result. In general, the amount of polypeptide immobilized on the membrane is selected to generate a visually discernible pattern when the biological sample contains a level of antibodies that would be sufficient to generate a positive signal in an enzyme linked immunosorbant assay (ELISA). In several embodiments, the amount of polypeptide immobilized on the membrane ranges from about 25 ng to about 1 μg, such as from about 50 ng to about 500 ng. Such tests can typically be performed with a very small volume of patient serum or blood.
    • Method for Detecting an Mtb Infection: Detection of Polynucleotides
  • Diagnostic reagents include the use of polynucleotide sequences encoding one or more of the above disclosed Mtb polypeptides. Mycobacterium infection can be detected by detecting the presence, absence, or level of mRNA encoding a Mycobacterium polypeptide in a biological sample. In several examples, hybridization assays are utilized, such as Northern blot or dot blot assays. In additional examples, PCR based assays are utilized.
  • General methods for mRNA extraction are well known in the art and are disclosed in standard textbooks of molecular biology, including Ausubel et al., Current Protocols of Molecular Biology, John Wiley and Sons (1997). Methods for RNA extraction from paraffin embedded tissues are disclosed, for example, in Rupp and Locker, Lab Invest. 56:A67 (1987), and De Andres et al., BioTechniques 18:42044 (1995). In particular, RNA isolation can be performed using purification kit, buffer set and protease from commercial manufacturers, such as QIAGEN®, according to the manufacturer's instructions. For example, total RNA from cells in culture (such as those obtained from a subject) can be isolated using QIAGEN® RNeasy mini-columns Other commercially available RNA isolation kits include MASTERPURE®. Complete DNA and RNA Purification Kit (EPICENTRE® Madison, Wis.), and Paraffin Block RNA Isolation Kit (Ambion, Inc.). Total RNA from tissue samples can be isolated using RNA Stat-60 (Tel-Test). RNA prepared a biological sample can be isolated, for example, by cesium chloride density gradient centrifugation.
  • Methods for quantitating mRNA are well known in the art. In one example, the method utilizes reverse transcriptase polymerase chain reaction (RT-PCR). Generally, the first step in gene expression profiling by RT-PCR is the reverse transcription of the RNA template into cDNA, followed by its exponential amplification in a PCR reaction. The two most commonly used reverse transcriptases are avian myeloblastosis virus reverse transcriptase (AMV-RT) and Moloney murine leukemia virus reverse transcriptase (MMLV-RT). The reverse transcription step is typically primed using specific primers, random hexamers, or oligo-dT primers, depending on the circumstances and the goal of expression profiling. For example, extracted RNA can be reverse-transcribed using a GeneAmp RNA PCR kit (Perkin Elmer, Calif., USA), following the manufacturer's instructions. The derived cDNA can then be used as a template in the subsequent PCR reaction.
  • Although the PCR step can use a variety of thermostable DNA-dependent DNA polymerases, it typically employs the Taq DNA polymerase, which has a 5′-3′ nuclease activity but lacks a 3′-5′ proofreading endonuclease activity. Thus, TaqMan® PCR typically utilizes the 5′-nuclease activity of Taq or Tth polymerase to hydrolyze a hybridization probe bound to its target amplicon, but any enzyme with equivalent 5′ nuclease activity can be used. Two oligonucleotide primers are used to generate an amplicon typical of a PCR reaction. A third oligonucleotide, or probe, is designed to detect nucleotide sequence located between the two PCR primers. The probe is non-extendible by Taq DNA polymerase enzyme, and is labeled with a reporter fluorescent dye and a quencher fluorescent dye. Any laser-induced emission from the reporter dye is quenched by the quenching dye when the two dyes are located close together as they are on the probe. During the amplification reaction, the Taq DNA polymerase enzyme cleaves the probe in a template-dependent manner. The resultant probe fragments disassociate in solution, and signal from the released reporter dye is free from the quenching effect of the second fluorophore. One molecule of reporter dye is liberated for each new molecule synthesized, and detection of the unquenched reporter dye provides the basis for quantitative interpretation of the data.
  • TAQMAN® RT-PCR can be performed using commercially available equipment, such as, for example, ABI PRISM 7700® Sequence Detection System™ (Perkin-Elmer-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif., USA), or Lightcycler (Roche Molecular Biochemicals, Mannheim, Germany). In one embodiment, the 5′ nuclease procedure is run on a real-time quantitative PCR device such as the ABI PRISM 7700®. Sequence Detection System®. The system includes of thermocycler, laser, charge-coupled device (CCD), camera and computer. The system amplifies samples in a 96-well format on a thermocycler. During amplification, laser-induced fluorescent signal is collected in real-time through fiber optics cables for all 96 wells, and detected at the CCD. The system includes software for running the instrument and for analyzing the data.
  • In some examples, 5′-Nuclease assay data are initially expressed as Ct, or the threshold cycle. As discussed above, fluorescence values are recorded during every cycle and represent the amount of product amplified to that point in the amplification reaction. The point when the fluorescent signal is first recorded as statistically significant is the threshold cycle (Ct).
  • To minimize errors and the effect of sample-to-sample variation, RT-PCR is can be performed using an internal standard. The ideal internal standard is expressed at a constant level among different tissues, and is unaffected by the experimental treatment. RNAs most frequently used to normalize patterns of gene expression are mRNAs for the housekeeping genes glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate-dehydrogenase (GAPDH), beta-actin, and 18S ribosomal RNA.
  • A more recent variation of the RT-PCR technique is the real time quantitative PCR, which measures PCR product accumulation through a dual-labeled fluorigenic probe (i.e., TAQMAN® probe). Real time PCR is compatible both with quantitative competitive PCR, where internal competitor for each target sequence is used for normalization, and with quantitative comparative PCR using a normalization gene contained within the sample, or a housekeeping gene for RT-PCR (see Held et al., Genome Research 6:986 994, 1996). Quantitative PCR is also described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,538,848, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. Related probes and quantitative amplification procedures are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,716,784 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,723,591, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference. Instruments for carrying out quantitative PCR in microtiter plates are available from PE Applied Biosystems, 850 Lincoln Centre Drive, Foster City, Calif. 94404 under the trademark ABI PRISM® 7700.
  • The steps of a representative protocol for quantitating gene expression using fixed, paraffin-embedded tissues as the RNA source, including mRNA isolation, purification, primer extension and amplification are given in various published journal articles (see Godfrey et al. J. Molec. Diagnostics 2: 84 91, 2000; K. Specht et al., Am. J. Pathol. 158: 419 29, 2001). Briefly, a representative process starts with cutting about 10 μm thick sections of paraffin-embedded tissue sample. The RNA is then extracted, and protein and DNA are removed. After analysis of the RNA concentration, RNA repair and/or amplification steps can be included, if necessary, and RNA is reverse transcribed using gene specific promoters followed by RT-PCR.
  • An alternative quantitative nucleic acid amplification procedure is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,219,727, which is incorporated herein by reference. In this procedure, the amount of a target sequence in a sample is determined by simultaneously amplifying the target sequence and an internal standard nucleic acid segment. The amount of amplified DNA from each segment is determined and compared to a standard curve to determine the amount of the target nucleic acid segment that was present in the sample prior to amplification.
  • In some embodiments of this method, the expression of a “house keeping” gene or “internal control” can also be evaluated. These terms are meant to include any constitutively or globally expressed gene whose presence enables an assessment of cytokine mRNA levels. Such an assessment comprises a determination of the overall constitutive level of gene transcription and a control for variations in RNA recovery.
    • Monitoring the Progression of an Infection and/or Effectiveness of Therapy
  • In several embodiments, the diagnostic methods disclosed herein are used for monitoring the progression of a Mycobacterium infection. In this embodiment, assays as described above for the diagnosis of a Mycobacterium infection may be performed over time, and the change in the level of reactive polypeptide(s) evaluated. For example, the assays can be performed about every 12, 24, 36, 48, 60 or 72 hours for a specified period, such as over months or weeks, and thereafter performed as needed.
  • In some examples, the presence of an Mtb polypeptide, or a polynucleotide encoding the polypeptide is assessed. Generally, the Mycobacterium infection is progressing in those patients in whom the level of polypeptide (such as detected using a binding agent), the level of polynucleotide, the level of antibodies, or the level of T cells increases over time. In contrast, the Mycobacterium infection is not progressing when the level of reactive polypeptide, the level of polynucleotide, the level of antibodies, or the level of T cells either remains constant or decreases with time. In this manner, the effectiveness of a particular therapeutic regimen can be assessed.
  • In one embodiment, the presence of an Mtb polypeptide is assessed in a subject. The subject is administered a therapeutic protocol. The presence of the Mtb polypeptide is then assessed. An increase or no change in the amount of the Mtb polypeptide (or polynucleotide) as compared to the amount of the Mtb polypeptide prior to the administration of the therapeutic protocol indicates that the therapeutic protocol in not effective, and the Mtb infection is progressing. A decrease in the amount of the Mtb polypeptide (or polynucleotide) as compared to the amount of the Mtb polypeptide (or polynucleotide) prior to the administration of the therapeutic protocol indicates that the therapeutic protocol is effective, and that the Mtb infection is not progressing.
  • In another embodiment, the presence of T cells, such as CD8+ T cells and/or CD4+ T cells, that specifically recognize an Mtb polypeptide is assessed in a subject. The subject is administered a therapeutic protocol. The presence of the T cells that specifically recognize the Mtb polypeptide is then assessed. An decrease or no change in the amount of CD8+ T cells and/or CD4+ T cells that specifically recognize the Mtb polypeptide as compared to the amount of the CD8+ T cells and/or CD4+ T cells, respectively, that specifically recognize the Mtb polypeptide prior to the administration of the therapeutic protocol indicates that the therapeutic protocol in not effective. An increase in the amount of the CD8+ T cells and/or CD4+ T cells that specifically recognize the Mtb polypeptide as compared to the amount of the CD8+ T cells and/or CD4+ T cells that specifically recognize the Mtb polypeptide prior to the administration of the therapeutic protocol indicates that the therapeutic protocol is effective.
  • It should be noted that for any of the above-described assays, to improve sensitivity, multiple Mycobacterium markers may be assayed within a given sample. It will be apparent that the assays disclosed herein can be used in combination. Thus, sets of Mycobacterium polypeptides, and combinations of assays can be for optimal sensitivity and specificity.
  • Numerous other assay protocols exist that are suitable for use with the polypeptides of the present invention. The above descriptions are intended to be exemplary only.
  • The disclosure is illustrated by the following non-limiting Examples.
    • EXAMPLES
  • For many infections, the repertoire of the CD8 response is shaped by the entry of antigen into the MHC-I processing pathway, binding of peptides and/or non-peptide antigens to MHC-I molecules, and recognition of these structures by T cells. Ultimately, a relatively limited subset of pathogen-specific T cells emerge. While a number of commonly recognized CD4 Mtb antigens have been described (Reed et al., Microbes Infect 7:922-931, 2005) (ESAT-6, CFP10, Ag85, etc.), surprisingly little is known about common Mtb antigens recognized by human CD8+ T cells. The majority of CD8 epitopes that have been identified were defined by testing of Mtb peptides selected for high affinity binding to MHC Class Ia molecules (HLA-A2 in most cases (see, for example, Lalvani, Microbes Infect 7:922-931, 1998)). In almost all of these, however, the ex vivo frequency of these T cells in Mtb-infected individuals is low or undetectable, suggesting that these specificities may not represent immunodominant responses. In contrast, in the limited cases in which T cells have been used to define epitopes contained in selected Mtb antigens, high ex vivo frequencies have been demonstrated (see Lewinsohn et al., Am J Respir Crit Care Med 166:843-848, 2002), suggesting, that a T cell-centered approach can identify immunodominant epitopes. Moreover, CD8 T cell responses to some Mtb antigens which represent good CD4 antigens (CFP10, ESAT-6, Ag85, and Mtb39) have been detected at high frequency in persons infected with Mtb. Therefore, a limited library of overlapping synthetic peptides representing several known CD4 Mtb antigens was used to determine the magnitude of the CD8 response to these antigens in persons with active tuberculosis (TB) and latent tuberculosis infection (LTBI) as well as uninfected subjects. Furthermore, a panel of Mtb-specific CD8+ T cell clones was utilized to define minimal epitopes recognized within these antigens and determined the contribution of these novel epitopes to the ex vivo Mtb-specific CD8 response.
    • Example 1 Materials and Methods
  • Human subjects. Uninfected individuals were defined as healthy individuals with a negative tuberculin skin test (TST) and no know risk factors for infection with Mtb. Individuals with LTBI were defined as healthy persons with a positive TST and no symptoms and signs of active TB. In all active TB cases, pulmonary TB was diagnosed by the TB Controller of the county and confirmed by positive sputum culture for Mycobacterium tuberculosis. Peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMC) were isolated from whole blood obtained by venipuncture or apheresis.
  • Media and Reagents. Culture medium consisted of RPMI 1640 supplemented with 10% Fetal Bovine Sera (FBS; Bio Whittaker), 5×10−5 M 2 ME (Sigma-Aldrich), and 2 mM glutamine (GIBCO BRL). For the growth and assay of Mtb-reactive T cell clones, RPMI 1640 was supplemented with 10% human serum. Mtb strain H37Rv was obtained from the American Type Culture Collection (Rockville, Md.) and prepared as previously described (Lewinsohn et al., J Immunol 165:925-930, 2000). Peptides were synthesized by Genemed Synthesis, Inc, (San Francisco, Calif.). Synthetic peptide pools consisted of 15-mers overlapping by 11 amino acids (aa) representing Mtb proteins demonstrated to be potent CD4 antigens. Peptide pools representing CFP-10 (Berthet et al., Microbiology 144:3195-3203, 1998; Dillon et al., J Clin Microbiol 38:3285-3290, 2000), ESAT-6 (Sorenson et al., Infect Immun 63:1710-1717, 1995), Mtb39a (two pools, A &B, reference) (Dillon et al., Infect Immun 67:2941-2950, 1999), Mtb8.4 (Coler et al., J Immunol 161:2356-2364, 1998), Mtb 9.9 (Alderson et al., J Exp Med 191:551-560, 2000), (Coler et al., J Immunol 161:2356-2364, 1998), Mtb 9.9 (Alderson et al., J Exp Med 191:551-560, 2000), EsxG (Rosenkrands et al., Electrophoresis 21:3740-3756, 2002), 19 kDa antigen (Collins et al. J Gen Microbiol 136:1429-1436, 1990), antigen 85b (Borremans et al., Infect Immun 57:3123-3130, 1989) (two pools, A & B, reference) were synthesized. Peptides were resuspended in DMSO and up to 50 peptides were combined into one pool such that each peptide in the pool was at a concentration of 1 mg/ml. Peptide pools were stored at −80° C.
  • Cell Lines and T Cell Clones. EBV-transformed B cell lines, LCL, were either generated using supernatants from the cell line 9B5-8 (American Type Culture Collection) or obtained from the National Marrow Donor Program (NMDP; Minneapolis, Minn.). LCL were maintained by continuous passage as previously described (Heinzel et al., J Exp Med 196:1473-1481, 2002). Mtb-specific T cell clones were isolated from individuals with LTBI or active tuberculosis, using Mtb-infected DCs as APCs and limiting dilution cloning methodology as previously described (Lewinsohn et al., J Immunol 165:925-930, 2000). Briefly, CD8+ T cells were isolated from PBMC using negative selection using CD4 antibody-coated beads and then positive selection using CD8 antibody-coated magnetic beads per the manufacturer's instructions (Miltenyi Biotec, Auburn Calif.) or via flow cytometry. In this case, CD4-PE (BD Biosciences cat #555347) negative, CD8-APC (BD Biosciences, cat #555369) positive cells (purity >99%) were sorted on a Becton Dickenson LSR II. T cells were seeded at various concentrations in the presence of a 1×105 irradiated autologous Mtb-infected DC, generated as described below, and rIL-2 (5 ng/ml) in cell culture media consisting of 200 μl of RPMI 1640 supplemented with 10% human sera. Wells exhibiting growth between 10-14 days, were assessed for Mtb specificity using ELISPOT and Mtb-infected DC as a source of APCs. T cells retaining Mtb specificity were further phenotyped for αβ T cell receptor expression and CD8 expression by FACS and expanded as described below. Vβ usage was determined using the IOTest Beta Mark Kit from Beckman Coulter.
  • Expansion of T cell clones. To expand the CD8+ T cell clones, a rapid expansion protocol using anti-CD3 mAb stimulation was used as described previously (Heinzel et al., J Exp Med 196:1473-1481, 2002).
  • Generation and Infection of Peripheral Blood DCs. Monocyte-derived DCs were prepared (Heinzel et al., supra; Romani et al., J Exp Med 180:83-93, 1994). To generate Mtb-infected DC, cells (1×106) were cultured overnight in the presence of Mtb (multiplicity of infection [MOI]=50:1). After 18 hours, the cells were harvested and resuspended in RPMI/10% human serum.
  • MHC binding assays. The MHC-peptide binding assay utilized measures the ability of peptide ligands to inhibit the binding of a radiolabeled peptide to purified MHC molecules, and has been described in detail elsewhere (Sidney et al., 1999. UNIT 18.3 Measurement of MHC/peptide interactions by gel filtration. In Current Protocols in Immunology. Coligan et al., eds., John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1996). Briefly, purified MHC molecules, test peptides, and a radiolabeled probe peptide were incubated at room temperature in the presence of human B2-microglobulin and a cocktail of protease inhibitors. After a two-day incubation, binding of the radiolabeled peptide to the corresponding MHC class I molecule was determined by capturing MHC/peptide complexes on W6/32 antibody (anti-HLA A, B, and C) or B123.2 (anti-HLA B, C and some A) coated plates, and bound counts per minute (cpm) were measured using a microscintillation counter. For competition assays, the concentration of peptide yielding 50% inhibition of the binding of the radiolabeled peptide was calculated. Peptides were typically tested at six different concentrations covering a 100,000-fold dose range, and in three or more independent assays. Under the conditions utilized, where [label]<[MHC] and IC50≧[MHC], the measured IC50 values are reasonable approximations of the true Kd values.
  • IFN-γ ELISPOT assay. The IFN-γ ELISPOT assay was performed as described previously (Beckman et al., J Immunol 157:2795-2803, 1996). For determination of ex vivo frequencies of CD4+ or CD8+ T cells responding to Mtb infection or Mtb antigens, CD4+ or CD8+ T-cells were positively selected from PBMC using magnetic beads (Miltenyi Biotec, Auburn Calif.) as a source of responder T cells and tested in duplicate at four different cell concentrations. Autologous DC (20,000 cells/well) were used as APC and DC were either infected with Mtb or pulsed with peptide pools (5 μg/ml, final concentration of each peptide) and then added to the assay. For assays using T cell clones, T cells (1000 or 5000 cells/well) were incubated with autologous LCL (20,000 cells/well) in the presence or absence of antigen.
  • Data analysis: To determine the ex vivo frequency of antigen-specific T cells, the average number of spots per well for each duplicate was plotted against the number of responder cells per well. Linear regression analysis was used to determine the slope of the line, which represents the frequency of antigen-specific T cells. The assay is considered positive, i.e. reflecting the presence of a primed T cell response, if the binomial probability (Lewinshon et al., Microbes Infect 8:2587-2598, 2006) for the number of spots is significantly different by experimental and control assays. To determine differences in ex vivo T cell frequencies between groups, Wilcoxon/Kruskal-Wallis analysis was used.
    • Example 2 Defining Immunodominant Mtb-Specific CD8+ Antigens
  • To define immunodominant Mtb-specific CD8+ antigens, and to determine whether or not these responses result from infection with Mtb, CD8+ T cells were used from donors uninfected, with LTBI, or actively infected with Mtb. Responses were determined either directly ex vivo, or using CD8+ T cell clones obtained by limiting dilution cloning on Mtb-infected autologous DC (Lewinsohn et al., J Immunol 165:925-930, 2000). As much is known about dominant CD4+ Mtb antigens, a panel of these commonly recognized antigens was selected for further evaluation. These were: Mtb39, CFP10, and Mtb8.4, Mtb9.9, ESAT-6, Ag85b, 19 kDa, and EsxG. To avoid bias introduced by using peptides of predicted HLA-binding specificity, we synthesized overlapping peptides (15 aa, overlap 11 aa) to represent the proteins of interest (Lewinshon et al., J Immunol 166:439-446, 2001).
  • To accurately determine the ex vivo effector cell frequencies of CD8+ T cells, linear regression analysis was used. As shown in FIG. 1, magnetic bead purified CD8+ T cells were tested against peptide pulsed DC over a range of CD8+ T cell numbers in an IFN-γ ELISPOT assay. A positive assay was determined as described below and if positive, the antigen specific frequency was determined using linear regression.
  • Subjects uninfected (n=14), those with LTBI (n=20) and those with active TB (n=12) were evaluated for CD8+ responses to a panel of Mtb CD4+ T cell antigens, as well as to Mtb-infected DC. All subjects tested had robust CD8+ T cell responses to Mtb-infected DC and were of greater magnitude in individuals with active TB than in those with LTBI (p=0.01; FIG. 2, Table I). However, CD8+ T cell responses to the panel of Mtb antigens were found almost exclusively in those infected with Mtb in that statistically significant differences between uninfected and Mtb-infected individuals were noted for seven of ten antigens for both the magnitude of the response (FIG. 2) and the proportion of positive assays (Table I).
  • TABLE I
    CD8+ T cell responses to known TB antigens.
    Mtb Infected Mtb Uninfected
    # positivea/ # positivea/
    Antigen # tested (%) # tested (%) P value (2 tail fishers)
    Mtb DC 17/17 (100)  11/11 (100)
    Mtb39 Pool A 13/30 (43) 0/14 (0) 0.003
    Mtb 39 Pool B 10/30 (33) 0/14 (0) 0.01
    CFP10 14/30 (47) 1/14 (7) 0.02
    Mtb 8.4 13/30 (43) 0/14 (0) 0.003
    Mtb 9.9 10/25 (40) 1/14 (7) 0.06
    ESAT 6 12/25 (48) 0/14 (0) 0.003
    Ag85b Pool A  5/22 (23) 1/14 (7) 0.37
    Ag85b Pool B  4/22 (18) 0/14 (0) 0.14
    19 kd  6/22 (27) 1/12 (8) 0.38
    EsxG  9/22 (41) 0/14 (0) 0.006
    aPositive assay defined in text.
  • However differences in CD8+ T cell responses between individuals with active TB and LTBI were not statistically different. While strong CD8+ T cell responses were observed against many of the antigens tested, it is equally notable that several subjects with strong Mtb directed CD8+ T cell responses did not have demonstrable responses to many of the antigens tested.
  • These ex vivo frequency data demonstrate the presence of high-frequency responses to a number of known Mtb antigens, but do not shed light on the restricting allele, minimal epitope, or dominance hierarchy within the gene of interest. To address this question, limiting dilution cloning of human CD8+ T cells using Mtb-infected DC was performed (see Lewinsohn et al., J Immunol 166:439-446, 2001), and panels of both classically and non-classically HLA-restricted CD8+ T cell clones were generated. Using peptide pools representing known CD4+ antigens, the antigenic specificity of the HLA-Ia restricted clones can be defined in more than half of the clones (Table II).
  • TABLE II
    Many CD8+ T cell clones recognize known CD4+ T cell antigens
    HLA-Ia Antigen
    Clones Identified # Distinct # Distinct
    Donor Tb Status (#)a (#)b Antigens (#)c Epitopes (#)d
    D431 Active TB 1 0 0 0
    D432 Active TB 14 4 2 2
    D466 Active TB 11 10 1 2
    D571 Active TB 7 7 1 1
    D480 Active TB 6 6 1 1
    D481 Active TB 11 11 1 1
    D426 LTBI 1 0 0 0
    D443 LTBI 1 1 1 1
    D454 LTBI 2 2 2 2
    D504 LTBI 7 1 1 1
    Totals 61 42 10 11
    aNumber of clones derived from donor.
    bNumber of clones for which cognate antigen was identified.
    cTotal number of distinct antigens identifed from the clone set.
    dTotal number of distinct epitopes identified from the clone set.
  • This approach is demonstrated in detail for a single representative clone, D466 D6, derived from a subject with active TB. As shown in FIG. 3A, testing the clone against autologous DC pulsed with a panel of peptide pools unambiguously defined the antigenic specificity as CFP10. The clone was then tested against each of the 15-mer peptides that comprise the CFP10 pool, revealing that the epitope was contained within CFP101-15 (FIG. 3B). Each possible 8 aa, 9 aa, 10 aa, and 11 aa peptide was then synthesized and tested for reactivity, revealing antigenic activity between aa 2-11 (FIG. 3C). Similarly, each clone was tested against lymphoblastoid cell lines (LCL) sharing at least one HLA-type with the donor (FIG. 3D). Autologous LCL and IHW 9058 LCL, which share B4501 and C1601, present the epitope to the clone, identifying both B4501 and C1601 as possible restricting alleles. However, C1601+ D433 LCL do not present the epitope, eliminating C1601 as a candidate restricting allele. Therefore D466 D6 is restricted by HLA-B4501. As demonstrated in FIG. 4, by testing each plausible epitope over a broad range of concentrations, the minimal epitope was defined as CFP102-10 for D466 D6. Experimental data supporting the assignment of the minimal epitope is provided for each clone in the supplemental Figure. A summary of the antigenic specificity, minimal epitope, and HLA-restricting allele is presented in Table III. Unexpectedly, all but one of the T cell clones were restricted by HLA-B alleles. Furthermore, a minority of those observed were 9 aa in length.
  • TABLE III
    Summary of Epitopes Identified
    HLA-
    Accession Restrict Epitope Epitope Sequence # MHC V beta
    Clonea Gene Number Allele Locat'n (SEQ ID NOs: 26-38) SFUb Bind.Aff.c region
    D160 1-1Bd (0) CFP10 Rv3874 B44  2-11 AEMKTDAATL 360 38
    D160 1-6Fd (0) CFP10 Rv3874 B14 85-94 RADEEQQQAL 120 NA
    D432 H12 (2) CFP10 Rv3874 B3514 49-58 TAAQAAVVRF 258 2011e  5.3
    D466 A10 (10) CFP10 Rv3874 B4501 2-9 AEMKTDAA 2458 48 IND
    D466 D6 (1) CFP10 Rv3874 B4501  2-12 AEMKTDAATLA 1993    6.2 22
    D481 C10 (10) CFP10 Rv3874 B1502 75-83 NIRQAGVQY 1715  14f 9
    D481 C11 (1) CFP10 Rv3874 B1502 75-83 NIRQAGVQY 1715  14f 13.6
    D480 F6 (6) CFP10 Rv3874 B0801  3-11 EMKTDAATL 387 79 13.1
    D571 B12 (3) CFP10 Rv3874 B4402  2-11 AEMKTDAATL 31 38 IND
    D571 E9 (4) CFP10 Rv3874 B4402  2-11 AEMKTDAATL 31 38 14
    D504 E4 (1) Mtb9.8 Rv0287 A0201  3-11 LLDAHIPQL <10     0.39 8
    D454 B10 (1) Mtb9.8 Rv0287 B0801 53-61 AAHARFVAA 88     0.22 IND
    D454 H1-2 (1) Mtb8.4 Rv1174c B1501  5-15 AVINTTCNYGQ 24 10 7.1
    D432 A3 (2) Mtb 8.4 Rv1174c B3514 32-40 ASPVAQSYL 210 127e 14
    D443 H9 (1) Ag85B Rv1886c TBD 144-153 ELPQWLSANR <10 NA 22
    aNumber of sister clones is in parentheses.
    b# of SFU/250,000 CD8+ T cells is shown.
    cIC50 in nm is shown.
    dPublished previously J Immunol. 2001 Jan 1; 166(1): 439-46.
    eMeasured binding affinity to B3501 is shown.
    fMeasured binding affinity to B1501 is shown.
    NA = Not Available.
    IND = Indeterminate
    TBD = To be done.
  • Because each of the individual CD8+ T cell clones were derived based on growth of Mtb-infected DC, it was determined whether or not the antigen and epitopes identified reflected immunodominant epitopes ex vivo. Two independent approaches were pursued, the first to determine if the response was present at high frequency, and the second to determine what proportion of the total response to the antigen is constituted by the epitope. To determine the ex-vivo effector cell frequency, as described in FIG. 1, each epitope was tested using autologous DC and magnetic bead purified CD8+ T cells derived from the donor from whom the T cell clones was isolated. A summary of the effector cell frequencies is presented in Table III. For the majority, the epitopes reflect high frequency responses, and thus could be considered a response that has been primed by exposure to Mtb. Notably, T cell clones isolated from four donors recognized CFP10. To determine if the epitopes defined reflected a substantial proportion of the total response to the antigen of interest, magnetic bead purified CD8+ T cells from three donors with sufficient available peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMC) were tested for reactivity to each individual 15-mer peptide, the peptide pool, and peptide representing the minimal epitope. As is demonstrated in FIG. 5, the ex vivo frequencies to the minimal epitope, 15-mer peptide(s) containing the minimal epitope, and peptide pool were remarkably concordant. These data suggested that for each donor a dominance hierarchy has been clearly established, and is reflected in the original clones. Finally, as is noted in Table III, daughter clones of identical specificity were frequently identified, a result that would be predicted based on an immundominance hierarchy. TCR V beta staining was used to confirm the clonal relationship between daughter clones. Interestingly, in two cases, the identical minimal epitope and HLA-restriction was represented by two distinct clones (Table III).
  • Because much work on human CD8+ T cell responses to Mtb has relied upon the use of HLA-prediction algorithms, as each epitope was defined we asked whether or not the epitopes would have been predicted by these approaches. Many of these epitopes were not ranked strongly. This might highlight the limitations of those algorithms at the time they were used. To address this question experimentally, the ICso for each peptide that had been synthesized in the course of definition of the minimal epitope was determined against a panel of human HLA molecules. Shown in Table III is the IC50 for the minimal epitope with the cognate restricting allele. The data demonstrated that the T cell epitopes bound avidly to HLA, and show a high degree of concordance between the T cell epitope data and HLA-binding data.
  • The data demonstrated that CD8+ T cell responses are present in persons infected with Mtb at frequencies that are comparable to that seen following many common viral infections such as vaccinia, influenza, and CMV. All but one of the epitopes that were mapped were restricted by HLA-B molecules. The data suggest that by using a T cell driven approach to epitope identification, dominant epitopes can be defined in humans infected with Mtb.
    • Example 3 Screening of T Cell Clones Against a Genomic Peptide Library
  • The classically-restricted and non-classically-restricted T cell clones (see Table II above) that did not recognize one of the known Mtb antigen peptide pools (Rv3875, Rv3874, Rv1886c, Rv0287, Rv3763, Rv1174c, Rv1196, Rv1793, Rv2346c, Rv1037c, Rv3619c and Rv1198) were screened against a genomic peptide library. This peptide library represents 389 genes, representing roughly 10% of the Mtb genome. The peptides are 15mers overlapping by 11 for each gene product. 50 nmol of each peptide was synthesized individually and then pooled into 777 pools of 50 peptides in a 96 well format (nine plates). Five blank wells and one well of an irrelevant peptide pool, SIV gag, were included on each of the nine plates. To screen the clones against the genomic peptide library, the clones are first expanded and tested against Mtb-infected DCs to ensure that each clone from this particular expansion yields a robust Mtb-specific signal in the ELISPOT assay. Then up to six T cell clones are pooled. For the screen, T cell clones (5,000 cells/well of each clone), autologous DCs (20,000 cells/well), IL-2 (0.5 ng/ml) and the peptide pools (5 ug/ml, individual peptides) were incubated overnight at 37 C in the ELISPOT assay. Only one technical replicate is done per pool because 5000 T cell clones per well with a peptide antigen produced an overwhelmingly positive response, resulting in a definitive result. Six classical clones from D504 were screened against the genomic peptide library, leading to the discovery of a new epitope. This epitope was from a family of four proteins that includes EsxJ, EsxW, EsxK and EsxP. These proteins share 98% homology and differ at only 3 amino acids. There is a fifth member of this family, EsxM (Rv1792), that was not included in the genomic peptide library.
  • The clones were screened against the individual fifteen-mers for these peptide pools. All six classical clones recognized EsxJ 21-35. This is a region of EsxJ that is identical to the other four members of this family. Next, 9, 10 and 11mer peptides were made from this 15mer and screened against each clone. The minimal epitope was determined to be EsxJ 24-34. In addition, the HLA restriction was found to be B5701.
    • Example 4 Additional Screening of T Cell Clones Against a Genomic Peptide Library
  • Eleven classical clones from D432B were screened against the genomic peptide library described above. The antigen was determined for two clones, which led to the identification of two novel epitopes, PE_PGRS4247-55 and PE953-67. The minimal epitope for one clone was determined to be PE_PGRS4247-55 and the HLA restriction was found to be B3514. The minimal epitope for the other clone is not yet determined, but is contained in the 15mer PE953-67. The HLA restriction for this clone was found to be B3905.
  • TABLE IV
    Detail of Novel Epitopes from Genomic Peptide Library Screens.
    MHC
    #SFU/ Binding
    250,000 Affinity TCR V
    Accession Epitope CD8+ MHC- (IC50 beta
    Clone Gene Number Location Epitope T-cells Restriction nm) region
    D504 EsxJ* Rv1038c 24-34 QTVEDE- 84 B5701 TBD Indeterminate
    F9 (6) SEQ ID NO: 2 ARRMW
    D432 PE9 Rv1088 53-67 RLFNAN- TBD B3905 TBD 8
    D8 SEQ ID NO: 7 AEEYHA-
    (1) LSA
    D432 PE_PGR Rv2487c 47-55 VSAAIAG- TBD B3514 TBD 7.1
    H8 S42 SEQ ID NO: 8 LF
    (1)
    Number of clones recognizing epitope from each donor in parentheses.
    *This is a family of proteins that have almost identical sequences. The family consists of Rv1038c, Rv1197, Rv2347, Rv3620c.
  • TABLE V
    Summary of Completed Clone Screens.
    #
    classical
    # Non- # classical clones
    # Classical Classical # positive # of clones epitope
    TB available available wells in confirmed # novel epitope NOT
    Donor Status (screened) (screened) screen hits epitopes identified identified
    426 PPD+ 1 (1) 4 (4) 1 0 0 0 1
    431 Active 1 (1) 1 (1)  1** 0 0 0 1
    432 Active 11 (11) 14 (7)  11  3 2 3 8
    454 PPD+ 1* (0)  6 (4) 0 0 0 0 0
    466 Active 1 (1) 4 (4) 1 0 0 0 1
    504 PPD+ 6 (6) 9 (9) 5 4 1 6 0
    21 (20) 38 (29) 18  7 3 9 11
    *The classical clone from D454 did not recognize Mtb upon re-expansion and was not screened against library.
    **The classical clones from 426 and 431 were screened together, so there was one positive well between both clones.
    • Example 5 Screening of Ex Vivo CD8+ T-Cells Against a Genomic Peptide Library
  • CD8+ T-cells from a LTBI donor, D610 (SE Asian) were screened against the genomic peptide library described above. Each plate of the genomic peptide library was screened in duplicate, for a total of 18 ELISPOT plates per screen. CD8+ T-cells were prepared from cryopreserved PBMC by CD8+ selection using magnetic bead separations. Resulting cell populations contained ≧96% CD8+ T cells. CD8+ T cells (250,000 cells/well), autologous DCs (20,000 cells/well), and IL-2 (0.5 ng/ml) were added to peptide (final 5 ug/ml, individual peptides) in the ELISPOT plates. Five media control wells are included on each plate. For each plate, the mean of these five wells was subtracted from each well of that plate to normalize between plates. Each technical replicate on each plate was then scored. A well was scored positive if the spot forming units (SFU), less the mean of the media wells, was greater than or equal to ten and the SFU was greater than or equal to twice the mean of the media. (Hudgens et al., J. Immunol. Methods 288: 19-34, 2004). This donor responded to the four peptide wells containing EsxJ, EsxW, EsxK and EsxP. CD8+ T-cells were then screened against each 15mer from these peptide pools and found to respond only to EsxJ 21-35, the same region of EsxJ, EsxW, EsxK and EsxP that is described in example 3 above.
  • Seven additional donors were screened against the genomic peptide library. The top 10 responses are detailed in Table 7. The four peptide pools highlighted in yellow contain peptides from only one gene. These four genes contain four novel epitopes.
  • TABLE 7
    Top 10 Responses from Peptide Pool Screens of Seven Donors. Spot
    Forming Units are for 250,000 CD8+ T-cells.
    Peptide Average
    Pool Donor SFU RvNumbers Represented in Wells Functional Category
    C09_1 D560 208.2 Rv1860(50): cell wall and cell
    processes
    C12_4 D545 156.4 Rv0468(27): Rv0456c(23): lipid metabolism
    A04_3 D454 136 Rv0284(17): Rv0288(11): Rv0287(22) cell wall and cell
    processes
    B10_3 D560 112.3 Rv1273c(50): cell wall and cell
    processes
    E04_4 D560 78.2 Rv0152c(40): Rv0151c(10): PE/PPE
    G12_8 D560 77.4 Rv3478(18): Rv3507(32): PE/PPE
    E07_4 D525 76.8 Rv0159c(50): PE/PPE
    A10_8 D560 70.4 Rv3136(47): Rv3144c(3): PE/PPE
    E11_8 D560 66.4 Rv3350c(50): PE/PPE
    E08_9 D545 60.2 Rv1404(13): Rv2711(37): regulatory proteins
    • Example 6 Animal Models
  • In tuberculosis research, the mouse model has been used extensively to model various aspects of the disease. Mice can be infected by a variety of routes, including intravenous, intraperitoneal and tracheal. One route is aerosolization of the organism for respiratory infection. The mice are exposed to the aerosol in a chamber (wither whole body or nose only infection). The dose of invention can be varied by manipulating the concentration of Mtb in the nebulizer or time of exposure. A low dose infection, such as about 50 colony forming units (CFU) via aerosol results in a slow and steady increase in bacterial numbers in the lungs, generally reaching a peak in four weeks, which coincides with the peak number of T cells in the lungs. The initial period is considered the acute stage of infection. Following infection, there is a dissemination of bacteria to the mediastinal lymph nodes. T cell priming is generally detectable between two and three weeks. After about four weeks the bacterial numbers stabilize, and there is a slow progressive pathologic response. This system is of use for modeling active infection.
  • The ability of a composition of interest to prevent infection in an animal model can be evaluated using the methods described herein. The effectiveness of the composition of interest can be monitored by measuring the T cell response, such as the number of CD8+ or CD4+ T cells responding to an Mtb polypeptide in a biological sample. For these assays T cells with one are contacted with at least one Mycobacterium polypeptides, and an antigen presenting cell presenting the one or more Mycobacterium polypeptides. The Mycobacterium polypeptides include the amino acid sequence set forth as (a) one of the amino acid sequences set forth as SEQ ID NO: 1, SEQ ID NO: 2, SEQ ID NO: 3, SEQ ID NO: 4, SEQ ID NO: 5, SEQ ID NO: 6, SEQ ID NO: 7, SEQ ID NO: 8, SEQ ID NO: 9, SEQ ID NO: 10, SEQ ID NO: 11 or SEQ ID NO: 12; or (b) at least nine to twenty consecutive amino acids of at least one of the amino acid sequences set forth as SEQ ID NO: 1, SEQ ID NO: 2, SEQ ID NO: 3, SEQ ID NO: 4, SEQ ID NO: 5, SEQ ID NO: 6, SEQ ID NO: 7, SEQ ID NO: 7, SEQ ID NO: 8, SEQ ID NO: 9, SEQ ID NO: 10, SEQ ID NO: 11 or SEQ ID NO: 12, wherein the nine to twenty consecutive amino acids specifically bind major histocompatibility complex (MHC) class I. It is determined if the determining if the T cells specifically recognize the Mycobacterium polypeptide. An increase in the number of T cells that specifically recognize the Mtb polypeptide indicates that the composition is effective.
  • Exemplary animal models are described below (see also Repique et al., Infec. Immun. 70: 3318-3323, 2002, incorporated herein by reference for an additional protocol):
  • A. Short Term Mouse Model:
  • C57BL/6 mice are vaccinated with a composition according to the appropriate protocol and then rested for 4 to 6 weeks Immunized mice are infected with a low dose aerosol 50-100 CFU) of virulent M. tuberculosis and protection is evaluated by assessing the number of viable bacilli 30 days post challenge.
  • Viable counts are performed on the lung and spleen of mice by homogenizing the organs and plating serial 10-fold dilutions on 7H11 agar plates. Plates are incubated for up to 21 days and the number of colony forming units per organ determined
  • BCG vaccinated mice have approximately 1Log10 protection in their lung and spleen when compared to PBS-treated mice.
  • A biological sample is obtained prior to the administration of the composition of interest and after administration of the composition of interest. Alternatively, biological samples are obtained from vehicle treated animals and from animals treated with the composition of interst. An increase in the number of T cells that bind an Mtb polypeptide as disclosed herein indicates the composition is effective.
  • B. Short Term Guinea Pig Model
  • Out-bred Hartley guinea pigs are vaccinated with a composition including one or more Mtb polypeptide, or a polynucleotide encoding these one or more polypeptides and then rested for 8 to 10 weeks Immunized guinea pigs are infected with a low dose aerosol (10-30 CFU) of virulent M. tuberculosis and protection is evaluated by assessing the number of viable bacilli 30 days post challenge.
  • Viable counts are performed on the lung and spleen of guinea pigs by homogenizing the organs and plating serial 10-fold dilutions on 7H11 agar plates. Plates are incubated for up to 21 days and the number of colony forming units per organ determined Lung and spleen segments are also taken for histological analyses.
  • BCG vaccinated guinea pigs have approximately 2-3Log10 protection in their lung and spleen when compared to PBS-treated guinea pigs. In addition, BCG vaccinated guinea pigs have well defined granulomas when compared to unvaccinated animals.
  • A biological sample is obtained prior to the administration of the composition of interest and after administration of the composition of interest. Alternatively, biological samples are obtained from vehicle treated animals and from animals treated with the composition of interst. An increase in the number of T cells that bind an Mtb polypeptide as disclosed herein indicates the composition is effective.
  • C. Long Term Guinea Pig Model
  • The guinea pig model is similar to the mouse model, but the experiments are open-ended survival type and can last for as long as 2 years. Guinea pigs develop ‘classical’ granulomas similar to humans with active tuberculosis (TB), and as lung tissue necrosis progresses, they begin to lose weight and die of TB similar to humans. The number of colony forming units in the lungs and spleen can be assessed. Histological examination can also be performed to determine the degree of lung involvement and tissue destruction. After low-dose aerosol exposure in the guinea pig the number of organisms increases progressively during the first three weeks and then plateaus into a chronic state. During the later stages of infection there is increased bacterial load in the lung and this is associated with a worsening pathological condition. Without treatment, there is a concomitant rise in both CD4 and CD8 T cells in the lungs of infected guinea pigs.
  • Out-bred Hartley guinea pigs are vaccinated with the experimental vaccine according to the appropriate protocol and then rested for 8 to 10 weeks Immunized guinea pigs are then infected with a low dose aerosol (10-30 CFU) of virulent M. tuberculosis. Guinea pigs are weighedweekly and monitored daily for signs of disease (such as increased respiration and failure to thrive). Unvaccinated guinea pigs succumb to infection from 20 to 25 weeks post challenge, while BCG vaccinated guinea pigs survive for 50 to 55 weeks post challenge.
  • At necropsy, the lung and spleen are assessed for the number of CFU and the extent of pathology. The relative protection of the experimental composition is compared to BCG vaccinated animals.
  • A biological sample is obtained prior to the administration of the composition of interest and after administration of the composition of interest. Alternatively, biological samples are obtained from vehicle treated animals and from animals treated with the composition of interst. An increase in the number of T cells that bind an Mtb polypeptide as disclosed herein indicates the composition is effective.
  • It will be apparent that the precise details of the methods or compositions described may be varied or modified without departing from the spirit of the described invention. We claim all such modifications and variations that fall within the scope and spirit of the claims below.

Claims (19)

1. A method for detecting Mycobacterium tuberculosis in a subject, comprising:
contacting a biological sample from the subject, wherein the biological sample comprises T cells, with one or more-isolated Mycobacterium polypeptides in vitro, wherein one of the isolated Mycobacterium polypeptides comprises the amino acid sequence set forth as SEQ ID NO: 7; and
performing an enzyme-linked immunospot assay that detects interferon-γ in order to determine if the T cells specifically recognize the Mycobacterium polypeptide, wherein a positive enzyme-linked immunospot assay that detects interferon-γ in the biological sample determines the presence of T cells that specifically recognize the Mycobacterium polypeptide and detects Mycobacterium tuberculosis in the subject.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein one of the isolated Mycobacterium polypeptides consists of the amino acid sequence set forth as SEQ ID NO: 7.
3. The method of claim 1, wherein the T cells are CD8+ T cells.
4. The method of claim 1, further comprising measuring the size of the T cells, the proliferation of the T cells, or a cell surface marker of the T cells.
5. The method of claim 1, wherein the biological sample is blood, isolated peripheral blood mononuclear cells, or isolated mononuclear cells.
6. The method of claim 1, wherein the biological sample is isolated T cells.
7. The method of claim 6, wherein the isolated T cells are cultured in vitro prior to contacting the biological sample with one or more-isolated Mycobacterium polypeptides, wherein one of the isolated Mycobacterium polypeptides comprises the amino acid sequence set forth as SEQ ID NO: 7.
8. The method of claim 6, wherein the T cells are cultured in vitro with antigen presenting cells.
9. The method of claim 7, wherein the one of the isolated Mycobacterium polypeptides consists of the amino acid sequence set forth as SEQ ID NO: 7.
10. A method for detecting a Mycobacterium tuberculosis infection in a subject, comprising:
contacting ex vivo a biological sample from the subject, wherein the biological sample comprises T cells, with antigen presenting cells presenting one or more Mycobacterium polypeptides, wherein the amino acid sequence of one of the one or more Mycobacterium polypeptides comprises the amino acid sequence set forth as SEQ ID NO: 7; and
contacting the sample with a capture monoclonal antibody that specifically binds interferon γ, wherein the capture monoclonal antibody is immobilized on a solid support, to form a complex; and
contacting the sample with an additional labeled antibody that specifically binds interferon γ to detect the presence of the complex, wherein the presence of the labeled antibody bound to the complex indicates the presence of T cells that specifically recognize one of the Mycobacterium polypeptides and detects the Mycobacterium tuberculosis infection in the subject. 25
11. The method of claim 10, wherein the biological sample is blood, isolated peripheral blood mononuclear cells, or isolated mononuclear cells.
12. The method of claim 10, wherein the labeled monoclonal antibody is labeled with an enzyme, a fluorescent marker, biotin or a radioactive marker.
13. The method of claim 12, wherein the labeled monoclonal antibody is labeled with biotin, and the method further comprises contacting the sample with streptavidin conjugated to an enzyme, a fluorescent marker or a radioactive marker.
14. The method of claim 10, wherein the one of the isolated Mycobacterium polypeptides consists of the amino acid sequence set forth as SEQ ID NO: 7.
15. A method for detecting Mycobacterium tuberculosis in a subject, comprising:
incubating a biological sample comprising 105 to 107 peripheral blood mononuclear cells isolated from the subject in vitro with one or more-isolated Mycobacterium polypeptides in a culture wherein one of the isolated Mycobacterium polypeptides comprises the amino acid sequence set forth as SEQ ID NO: 7 and is present at a concentration of 10−1 to 103 μg per ml of the culture, and wherein the peripheral blood mononuclear cells are incubated with the polypeptide for about 4 to about 24 hours; and
performing an assay in order to determine if T cells in the biological sample specifically recognize the Mycobacterium polypeptide, wherein the presence of T cells that specifically recognize the Mycobacterium polypeptide and detects Mycobacterium tuberculosis in the subject, wherein the assay comprises one or more of a) determining if the polypeptide binds T cells; b) evaluating cytolytic activity of the T cells; c) evaluating proliferation of the T cells, d) detecting the secretion of interferon gamma, interleukin-2 or tumor necrosis factor alpha, or e) any combination of a)-d).
16. The method of claim 15, wherein one of the isolated Mycobacterium polypeptides consists of the amino acid sequence set forth as SEQ ID NO: 7.
17. The method of claim 16, wherein the T cells are CD8+ T cells.
18. A method for detecting Mycobacterium tuberculosis in a subject, comprising:
isolating CD8+ T cells from a biological sample from the subject;
incubating the CD8+ T cells isolated from the subject in vitro with antigen presenting cells and with one or more-isolated Mycobacterium polypeptides in a culture, wherein one of the isolated Mycobacterium polypeptides comprises the amino acid sequence set forth as SEQ ID NO: 7 and is present at a concentration of 10−1 to 103 μg per ml of the culture, and wherein the CD8+ T cells are incubated with the polypeptide for about 4 to about 24 hours; and
performing an assay in order to determine if T cells in the biological sample specifically recognize the Mycobacterium polypeptide, wherein the presence of T cells that specifically recognize the Mycobacterium polypeptide and detects Mycobacterium tuberculosis in the subject, wherein the assay comprises one or more of a) determining if the polypeptide binds T cells; b) evaluating cytolytic activity of the T cells; c) evaluating proliferation of the T cells, d) detecting the secretion of interferon gamma, interleukin-2 or tumor necrosis factor alpha, or e) any combination of a)-d).
19. The method of claim 18, wherein one of the isolated Mycobacterium polypeptides consists of the amino acid sequence set forth as SEQ ID NO: 7.
US14/693,609 2006-03-14 2015-04-22 Methods for detecting a mycobacterium tuberculosis infection Abandoned US20150219645A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US14/693,609 US20150219645A1 (en) 2006-03-14 2015-04-22 Methods for detecting a mycobacterium tuberculosis infection

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US78236406P 2006-03-14 2006-03-14
PCT/US2007/006534 WO2007106560A2 (en) 2006-03-14 2007-03-14 Methods for detecting a mycobacterium tuberculosis infection
US28286209A 2009-01-09 2009-01-09
US13/244,126 US8361707B2 (en) 2006-03-14 2011-09-23 Methods for detecting a Mycobacterium tuberculosis infection
US13/719,124 US9040233B2 (en) 2006-03-14 2012-12-18 Methods for detecting a Mycobacterium tuberculosis infection
US14/693,609 US20150219645A1 (en) 2006-03-14 2015-04-22 Methods for detecting a mycobacterium tuberculosis infection

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/719,124 Continuation US9040233B2 (en) 2006-03-14 2012-12-18 Methods for detecting a Mycobacterium tuberculosis infection

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20150219645A1 true US20150219645A1 (en) 2015-08-06

Family

ID=38208601

Family Applications (7)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/282,865 Active US7842299B2 (en) 2006-03-14 2007-03-14 Methods for producing an immune response to tuberculosis
US12/282,862 Active 2027-09-30 US8053181B2 (en) 2006-03-14 2007-03-14 Methods for detecting a Mycobacterium tuberculosis infection
US12/894,051 Active US8101192B2 (en) 2006-03-14 2010-09-29 Methods for producing an immune response to tuberculosis
US13/244,126 Active US8361707B2 (en) 2006-03-14 2011-09-23 Methods for detecting a Mycobacterium tuberculosis infection
US13/332,150 Active US8440206B2 (en) 2006-03-14 2011-12-20 Methods for producing an immune response to tuberculosis
US13/719,124 Active US9040233B2 (en) 2006-03-14 2012-12-18 Methods for detecting a Mycobacterium tuberculosis infection
US14/693,609 Abandoned US20150219645A1 (en) 2006-03-14 2015-04-22 Methods for detecting a mycobacterium tuberculosis infection

Family Applications Before (6)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/282,865 Active US7842299B2 (en) 2006-03-14 2007-03-14 Methods for producing an immune response to tuberculosis
US12/282,862 Active 2027-09-30 US8053181B2 (en) 2006-03-14 2007-03-14 Methods for detecting a Mycobacterium tuberculosis infection
US12/894,051 Active US8101192B2 (en) 2006-03-14 2010-09-29 Methods for producing an immune response to tuberculosis
US13/244,126 Active US8361707B2 (en) 2006-03-14 2011-09-23 Methods for detecting a Mycobacterium tuberculosis infection
US13/332,150 Active US8440206B2 (en) 2006-03-14 2011-12-20 Methods for producing an immune response to tuberculosis
US13/719,124 Active US9040233B2 (en) 2006-03-14 2012-12-18 Methods for detecting a Mycobacterium tuberculosis infection

Country Status (7)

Country Link
US (7) US7842299B2 (en)
EP (13) EP2207035B1 (en)
CN (1) CN101438166A (en)
BR (2) BRPI0708865A8 (en)
CA (1) CA2649688A1 (en)
WO (2) WO2007106560A2 (en)
ZA (2) ZA200808644B (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2018068064A3 (en) * 2016-09-22 2018-06-28 Nguyen Hiep Hoa T Mycobacterium tuberculosis proteins in diagnostic assays and devices for tuberculosis detection and diagnosis
US10684275B2 (en) 2016-12-14 2020-06-16 Becton, Dickinson And Company Methods and compositions for obtaining a tuberculosis assessment in a subject
US10973908B1 (en) 2020-05-14 2021-04-13 David Gordon Bermudes Expression of SARS-CoV-2 spike protein receptor binding domain in attenuated salmonella as a vaccine

Families Citing this family (21)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
AU1486102A (en) 2000-11-07 2002-05-21 Immunovaccine Technologies Inc Vaccines with enhanced immune response and methods for their preparation
BRPI0708865A8 (en) * 2006-03-14 2019-01-22 Univ Oregon Health & Science methods to produce an immune response to tuberculosis
ATE504000T1 (en) * 2006-09-05 2011-04-15 Hvidovre Hospital IP-10 BASED IMMUNOLOGICAL MONITORING
BRPI0604958B1 (en) * 2006-11-23 2022-05-17 Fundação Oswaldo Cruz Kit for distinguishing mycobacterium tuberculosis, m. bovis, m. bovis bcg in a sample, and method to distinguish mycobacterium tuberculosis, m. bovis, m. bovis bcg
EP2197497B1 (en) 2007-09-27 2016-06-01 ImmunoVaccine Technologies Inc. Use of liposomes in a carrier comprising a continuous hydrophobic phase for delivery of polynucleotides in vivo
US20100209452A1 (en) * 2007-10-03 2010-08-19 Immunovaccine Technologies, Inc Compositions comprising an antigen, an amphipathic compound and a hydrophobic carrier, and uses thereof
EP2296696B1 (en) 2008-06-05 2014-08-27 ImmunoVaccine Technologies Inc. Compositions comprising liposomes, an antigen, a polynucleotide and a carrier comprising a continuous phase of a hydrophobic substance
AT506819B1 (en) * 2008-06-12 2011-06-15 Affiris Forschungs Und Entwicklungs Gmbh VACCINE FOR THE TREATMENT OF ALZHEIMER DISEASE
EP2353008A2 (en) * 2008-09-22 2011-08-10 Oregon Health and Science University Methods for detecting a mycobacterium tuberculosis infection
US8486323B2 (en) 2009-08-28 2013-07-16 Dow Global Technologies Llc Rotational molded articles, and method of making the same
EP2501397B1 (en) * 2009-11-20 2017-10-04 Oregon Health and Science University Methods for producing an immune response to tuberculosis
CN103998058B (en) 2011-10-06 2021-11-05 免疫疫苗技术有限公司 Liposome composition comprising adjuvant for activating or increasing TLR2 activity and application thereof
US20140349320A1 (en) * 2011-12-15 2014-11-27 The Trustees Of The University Of Pennsylvania Using Adaptive Immunity to Detect Drug Resistance
CN103864907B (en) * 2012-12-18 2016-12-28 中国医学科学院病原生物学研究所 Albumen and test kit for diagnosis of tuberculosis
CN104151411B (en) * 2013-05-14 2018-03-20 中国医学科学院病原生物学研究所 Albumen and pharmaceutical composition for diagnosis of tuberculosis
TWI654200B (en) 2013-08-30 2019-03-21 環球免疫公司 Composition and method for treating or preventing tuberculosis
US9970062B2 (en) * 2015-08-06 2018-05-15 Roche Molecular Systems, Inc. Compositions and methods for detection of mycobacterium tuberculosis
CN107304231B (en) * 2016-04-18 2021-01-01 华中农业大学 Mycobacterium tuberculosis fusion protein and application thereof
EP3784275A4 (en) * 2018-04-26 2022-03-30 Children's National Medical Center Mycobacterial antigen compositions and methods of use
CN112322566A (en) * 2020-11-17 2021-02-05 中国农业科学院北京畜牧兽医研究所 Mycobacterium bovis attenuated strain and application thereof
CN116284283A (en) * 2021-12-13 2023-06-23 江苏瑞科生物技术股份有限公司 Recombinant mycobacterium tuberculosis antigen, preparation method and application thereof

Family Cites Families (114)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4235871A (en) 1978-02-24 1980-11-25 Papahadjopoulos Demetrios P Method of encapsulating biologically active materials in lipid vesicles
US4444487A (en) 1979-07-02 1984-04-24 Xerox Corporation Multiple-flash fuser
US4603112A (en) 1981-12-24 1986-07-29 Health Research, Incorporated Modified vaccinia virus
US4722848A (en) 1982-12-08 1988-02-02 Health Research, Incorporated Method for immunizing animals with synthetically modified vaccinia virus
US7045313B1 (en) 1982-11-30 2006-05-16 The United States Of America As Represented By The Department Of Health And Human Services Recombinant vaccinia virus containing a chimeric gene having foreign DNA flanked by vaccinia regulatory DNA
US4501728A (en) 1983-01-06 1985-02-26 Technology Unlimited, Inc. Masking of liposomes from RES recognition
GB8308235D0 (en) 1983-03-25 1983-05-05 Celltech Ltd Polypeptides
US4816567A (en) 1983-04-08 1989-03-28 Genentech, Inc. Recombinant immunoglobin preparations
US4957735A (en) 1984-06-12 1990-09-18 The University Of Tennessee Research Corporation Target-sensitive immunoliposomes- preparation and characterization
US5019369A (en) 1984-10-22 1991-05-28 Vestar, Inc. Method of targeting tumors in humans
US4683195A (en) 1986-01-30 1987-07-28 Cetus Corporation Process for amplifying, detecting, and/or-cloning nucleic acid sequences
US4745055A (en) 1985-05-07 1988-05-17 California Biotechnology Inc. Fused protein for enzyme immunoassay system
US4895800A (en) 1985-11-26 1990-01-23 Phillips Petroleum Company Yeast production of hepatitis B surface antigen
US4811254A (en) 1985-12-17 1989-03-07 Nippon Gakki Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha Displacement detector for an encoder
US5091309A (en) 1986-01-16 1992-02-25 Washington University Sindbis virus vectors
CA1340456C (en) 1986-07-07 1999-03-23 Hubert J.P. Schoemaker Chimeric rodent/human immunoglobulins specific for tumor-associated antigens
US4902505A (en) 1986-07-30 1990-02-20 Alkermes Chimeric peptides for neuropeptide delivery through the blood-brain barrier
GB8626412D0 (en) 1986-11-05 1986-12-03 Clark M R Antibodies
US4837028A (en) 1986-12-24 1989-06-06 Liposome Technology, Inc. Liposomes with enhanced circulation time
AP56A (en) 1987-01-30 1989-09-26 Smithkline Biologicals S A Hepatitis B virus surface antigens and hybrid antigehs containing them.
ATE105858T1 (en) 1987-07-17 1994-06-15 Rhein Biotech Ges Fuer Biotech DNA MOLECULES ENCODING FMDH CONTROL PART AND STRUCTURAL GENES FOR A PROTEIN WITH FMDH ACTIVITY AND THEIR APPLICATIONS.
US5004697A (en) 1987-08-17 1991-04-02 Univ. Of Ca Cationized antibodies for delivery through the blood-brain barrier
DE10399032I1 (en) 1987-08-28 2004-01-29 Health Research Inc Recombinant viruses.
CA1340203C (en) 1987-09-16 1998-12-15 Noboru Yanagida Recombinant apivoxvirus
CA1323293C (en) 1987-12-11 1993-10-19 Keith C. Backman Assay using template-dependent nucleic acid probe reorganization
JPH0630628B2 (en) 1987-12-16 1994-04-27 キング醸造株式会社 Method for measuring the number of viable cells and vitality
US4957795A (en) 1988-05-13 1990-09-18 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Absorbent elastomeric wound dressing
WO1990001069A1 (en) 1988-07-20 1990-02-08 Segev Diagnostics, Inc. Process for amplifying and detecting nucleic acid sequences
US5093258A (en) 1988-08-26 1992-03-03 Therion Biologics Corporation Recombinant fowlpox virus and recombination vector
US5217879A (en) 1989-01-12 1993-06-08 Washington University Infectious Sindbis virus vectors
US5055303A (en) 1989-01-31 1991-10-08 Kv Pharmaceutical Company Solid controlled release bioadherent emulsions
US5703055A (en) 1989-03-21 1997-12-30 Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation Generation of antibodies through lipid mediated DNA delivery
US5188937A (en) 1989-04-06 1993-02-23 Becton, Dickinson And Company Layered sandwich assay method for chlamydia and materials therefor
US5270202A (en) 1989-11-03 1993-12-14 Syamal Raychaudhuri Anti-idiotypic antibodies to human melanoma-associated proteoglycan antigen
US5271961A (en) 1989-11-06 1993-12-21 Alkermes Controlled Therapeutics, Inc. Method for producing protein microspheres
US5188837A (en) 1989-11-13 1993-02-23 Nova Pharmaceutical Corporation Lipsopheres for controlled delivery of substances
US5427930A (en) 1990-01-26 1995-06-27 Abbott Laboratories Amplification of target nucleic acids using gap filling ligase chain reaction
GB9007024D0 (en) 1990-03-29 1990-05-30 Imperial College Novel vaccine
US5268164A (en) 1990-04-23 1993-12-07 Alkermes, Inc. Increasing blood-brain barrier permeability with permeabilizer peptides
WO1991019803A1 (en) 1990-06-19 1991-12-26 Applied Biotechnology, Incorporated Self assembled, defective, nonself-propagating viral particles
US5709860A (en) 1991-07-25 1998-01-20 Idec Pharmaceuticals Corporation Induction of cytotoxic T-lymphocyte responses
MX9204376A (en) 1991-07-25 1993-02-01 Idec Pharma Corp COMPOSITIONS AND METHODS TO INDUCE CYTOTOXIC RESPONSES FROM T-LYMPHOCYTES.
US5254342A (en) 1991-09-30 1993-10-19 University Of Southern California Compositions and methods for enhanced transepithelial and transendothelial transport or active agents
US5643578A (en) 1992-03-23 1997-07-01 University Of Massachusetts Medical Center Immunization by inoculation of DNA transcription unit
JPH07507768A (en) 1992-03-12 1995-08-31 アルカーメス　コントロールド　セラピューティクス，インコーポレイテッド Controlled release of ACTH-containing microspheres
US5534496A (en) 1992-07-07 1996-07-09 University Of Southern California Methods and compositions to enhance epithelial drug transport
US5662907A (en) 1992-08-07 1997-09-02 Cytel Corporation Induction of anti-tumor cytotoxic T lymphocytes in humans using synthetic peptide epitopes
CA2142007C (en) 1992-08-11 2007-10-30 Robert Glen Urban Immunomodulatory peptides
FR2698877B1 (en) 1992-12-04 1995-04-07 Atochem Elf Sa Composition hot-melt adhesive crosslinkable to moisture.
US5593972A (en) 1993-01-26 1997-01-14 The Wistar Institute Genetic immunization
US6991797B2 (en) 1993-07-02 2006-01-31 Statens Serum Institut M. tuberculosis antigens
US5514670A (en) 1993-08-13 1996-05-07 Pharmos Corporation Submicron emulsions for delivery of peptides
US5648211A (en) 1994-04-18 1997-07-15 Becton, Dickinson And Company Strand displacement amplification using thermophilic enzymes
US6429199B1 (en) 1994-07-15 2002-08-06 University Of Iowa Research Foundation Immunostimulatory nucleic acid molecules for activating dendritic cells
US6207646B1 (en) 1994-07-15 2001-03-27 University Of Iowa Research Foundation Immunostimulatory nucleic acid molecules
ES2168380T3 (en) 1994-07-15 2002-06-16 Organon Teknika Bv USE OF RNA POLYMERASE TO IMPROVE A PROCEDURE FOR AMPLIFICATION OF NUCLEIC ACID.
US6239116B1 (en) 1994-07-15 2001-05-29 University Of Iowa Research Foundation Immunostimulatory nucleic acid molecules
CA2194761C (en) 1994-07-15 2006-12-19 Arthur M. Krieg Immunomodulatory oligonucleotides
US6045802A (en) 1994-10-03 2000-04-04 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Department Of Health And Human Services Enhanced immune response to an antigen by a composition of a recombinant virus expressing the antigen with a recombinant virus expressing an immunostimulatory molecule
EP1016418B1 (en) 1994-10-03 2009-12-30 THE GOVERNMENT OF THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, as represented by THE SECRETARY, DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH AND HUMAN SERVICES Host cell comprising a recombinant virus expressing an antigen and a recombinant virus expressing an immunostimulatory molecule
US5736524A (en) * 1994-11-14 1998-04-07 Merck & Co.,. Inc. Polynucleotide tuberculosis vaccine
AT402203B (en) 1995-06-13 1997-03-25 Himmler Gottfried Dipl Ing Dr METHOD FOR TRANSCRIPTION-FREE AMPLIFICATION OF NUCLEIC ACIDS
US6165460A (en) 1995-07-10 2000-12-26 Therion Biologics Corporation Generation of immune responses to prostate-specific antigen (PSA)
JP2001513776A (en) 1997-02-28 2001-09-04 ユニバーシティ オブ アイオワ リサーチ ファウンデーション Use of nucleic acids containing unmethylated CpG dinucleotides in the treatment of LPS-related disorders
US6406705B1 (en) 1997-03-10 2002-06-18 University Of Iowa Research Foundation Use of nucleic acids containing unmethylated CpG dinucleotide as an adjuvant
AU740545B2 (en) * 1997-04-02 2001-11-08 Statens Serum Institut Nucleic acid fragments and polypeptide fragments derived from M. tuberculosis
US7037510B2 (en) * 1997-04-18 2006-05-02 Statens Serum Institut Hybrids of M. tuberculosis antigens
WO1998052581A1 (en) 1997-05-20 1998-11-26 Ottawa Civic Hospital Loeb Research Institute Vectors and methods for immunization or therapeutic protocols
US6555653B2 (en) 1997-05-20 2003-04-29 Corixa Corporation Compounds for diagnosis of tuberculosis and methods for their use
US6613881B1 (en) 1997-05-20 2003-09-02 Corixa Corporation Compounds for immunotherapy and diagnosis of tuberculosis and methods of their use
EP1484405A1 (en) * 1997-11-10 2004-12-08 Statens Serum Institut Nucleic acid fragments and polypeptide fragments derived from M. Tuberculosis
EP1029053A1 (en) 1997-11-10 2000-08-23 Statens Seruminstitut Nucleic acid fragments and polypeptide fragments derived from mycobacterium tuberculosis
CA2323929C (en) 1998-04-03 2004-03-09 University Of Iowa Research Foundation Methods and products for stimulating the immune system using immunotherapeutic oligonucleotides and cytokines
US6294328B1 (en) 1998-06-24 2001-09-25 The Institute For Genomic Research DNA sequences for strain analysis in Mycobacterium tuberculosis
US20020131976A1 (en) * 1998-12-23 2002-09-19 Ajit Lalvani Tuberculosis vaccine
EP2087906A1 (en) * 1999-05-04 2009-08-12 The University of Medicine and Dentistry of New Jersey Proteins expressed by Mycobacterium tuberculosis and not by BCG and their use as diagnostic reagents and vaccines
EP1218030A4 (en) 1999-09-10 2004-09-15 Univ Fordham Methods and compositions for the treatment and prevention of graft rejection using heat shock proteins
US6861513B2 (en) 2000-01-12 2005-03-01 Schering Corporation Everninomicin biosynthetic genes
WO2001062893A2 (en) 2000-02-25 2001-08-30 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for diagnosis and immunotherapy of tuberculosis
JP4852211B2 (en) 2000-03-21 2012-01-11 メルク アンド カンパニー インコーポレイテッド Identification of essential genes in prokaryotes
US7657378B1 (en) * 2000-03-30 2010-02-02 Council Of Scientific & Industrial Research Computer based method for identifying peptides useful as drug targets
WO2001079257A2 (en) 2000-04-14 2001-10-25 Phytera, Inc. Multidrug resistance (mdr) efflux pump polypeptides
KR100464485B1 (en) 2000-11-09 2004-12-31 엘지전자 주식회사 A method and a device of transmitting high-speed packet data
CA2430896A1 (en) 2000-12-13 2002-06-20 Argonex Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Mhc class i associated peptides for prevention and treatment of tuberculosis
WO2002077183A2 (en) * 2001-03-21 2002-10-03 Elitra Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Identification of essential genes in microorganisms
FI116851B (en) * 2001-05-03 2006-03-15 Fit Biotech Oyj Plc Expression vector, its uses and process for its preparation and products containing it
US7067492B2 (en) * 2001-09-06 2006-06-27 Omnio Ab Method of promoting healing of a tympanic membrane perforation
GB0124593D0 (en) * 2001-10-12 2001-12-05 Microbiological Res Authority Mycobacterial antigens expressed under high oxygen tension
US20040029129A1 (en) * 2001-10-25 2004-02-12 Liangsu Wang Identification of essential genes in microorganisms
AU2002347346A1 (en) 2001-12-07 2003-06-17 University Of Liverpool Dna vaccine
JP4229238B2 (en) 2002-02-08 2009-02-25 ザ ディレクター、オール インディア インスチチュート オブ メディカル サイエンス Methods for identifying novel targets for use in the development of tuberculosis treatments and drugs
US7074559B2 (en) * 2002-03-06 2006-07-11 Refents of the University of Minnesota Mycobacterial diagnostics
US20030236393A1 (en) * 2002-03-22 2003-12-25 United States Of America Dept Of Vetrans Affairs Virulence genes of M. marinum and M. tuberculosis
WO2004006952A2 (en) * 2002-07-13 2004-01-22 Statens Serum Institut Therapeutic tuberculosis vaccines
US7364869B2 (en) * 2003-07-29 2008-04-29 The J. David Gladstone Institutes Method of detecting antigen-specific T lymphocytes
ITRM20030411A1 (en) * 2003-08-29 2005-02-28 Consiglio Nazionale Ricerche USE OF SPECIFIC GENE SEQUENCES OF MYCOBACTERIUM TUBERCOLOSIS IN ADDITIONAL PROTEINS FOR DIAGNOSIS AND PREVENTION OF TUBERCULAR INFECTION.
EP1518932A1 (en) * 2003-09-29 2005-03-30 GSF-Forschungszentrum für Umwelt und Gesundheit GmbH Modified vaccinia virus Ankara (MVA) mutant and use thereof
US7424370B2 (en) 2004-02-06 2008-09-09 Council Of Scientific And Industrial Research Computational method for identifying adhesin and adhesin-like proteins of therapeutic potential
GB0406271D0 (en) * 2004-03-19 2004-04-21 Isis Innovation Diagnostic test
US20090070897A1 (en) * 2006-01-12 2009-03-12 Goldman Barry S Genes and uses for plant improvement
US7566459B2 (en) * 2005-02-28 2009-07-28 New York University Modified mycobacterium tuberculosis strains and uses thereof
SI2457926T1 (en) * 2005-04-29 2015-01-30 Glaxosmithkline Biologicals S.A. Novel method for preventing or treating M. tuberculosis infection
ATE530569T1 (en) 2005-07-01 2011-11-15 Forsyth Dental In Ry For Children Fa ASSAY FOR THE DETECTION OF TUBERCULOSIS ANTIGENS AND VACCINES
BRPI0708865A8 (en) * 2006-03-14 2019-01-22 Univ Oregon Health & Science methods to produce an immune response to tuberculosis
KR100756676B1 (en) 2006-11-23 2007-09-07 제일모직주식회사 Silicone bead, method for preparing the same, and thermoplastic resin composition using the same
MX351247B (en) * 2007-04-04 2017-10-05 Infectious Disease Res Institute Star Immunogenic compositions comprising mycobacterium tuberculosis polypeptides and fusions thereof.
EP2197908A2 (en) * 2007-09-27 2010-06-23 Dako Denmark A/S Mhc multimers in tuberculosis diagnostics, vaccine and therapeutics
PL2315834T3 (en) * 2008-07-25 2018-12-31 Glaxosmithkline Biologicals S.A. The tuberculosis rv2386c protein, compositions and uses thereof
AU2009273128A1 (en) * 2008-07-25 2010-03-11 All India Institute Of Medical Science Constructing a DNA chimera for vaccine development against Leishmaniasis and tuberculosis
EP2353008A2 (en) 2008-09-22 2011-08-10 Oregon Health and Science University Methods for detecting a mycobacterium tuberculosis infection
WO2010037402A1 (en) * 2008-10-02 2010-04-08 Dako Denmark A/S Molecular vaccines for infectious disease
US8691502B2 (en) * 2008-10-31 2014-04-08 Tremrx, Inc. T-cell vaccination with viral vectors via mechanical epidermal disruption
EP2501397B1 (en) * 2009-11-20 2017-10-04 Oregon Health and Science University Methods for producing an immune response to tuberculosis
US10703784B2 (en) * 2011-09-30 2020-07-07 La Jolla Institute For Allergy And Immunology Antigens and epitopes derived from Mycobacterium tuberculosis

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2018068064A3 (en) * 2016-09-22 2018-06-28 Nguyen Hiep Hoa T Mycobacterium tuberculosis proteins in diagnostic assays and devices for tuberculosis detection and diagnosis
US10684275B2 (en) 2016-12-14 2020-06-16 Becton, Dickinson And Company Methods and compositions for obtaining a tuberculosis assessment in a subject
US10973908B1 (en) 2020-05-14 2021-04-13 David Gordon Bermudes Expression of SARS-CoV-2 spike protein receptor binding domain in attenuated salmonella as a vaccine
US11406702B1 (en) 2020-05-14 2022-08-09 David Gordon Bermudes Expression of SARS-CoV-2 spike protein receptor binding domain in attenuated Salmonella as a vaccine

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US8361707B2 (en) 2013-01-29
BRPI0708912B8 (en) 2021-07-27
ZA200808643B (en) 2014-03-26
EP2207035B1 (en) 2013-10-16
EP2397854A2 (en) 2011-12-21
CN101438166A (en) 2009-05-20
US8053181B2 (en) 2011-11-08
WO2007106560A2 (en) 2007-09-20
EP2397855A2 (en) 2011-12-21
WO2007106560A3 (en) 2007-12-13
EP2397852A3 (en) 2012-03-14
EP2397853B1 (en) 2014-01-15
US20120107341A1 (en) 2012-05-03
EP2397855A3 (en) 2012-03-14
EP2397853A2 (en) 2011-12-21
EP2005184A2 (en) 2008-12-24
US20120014881A1 (en) 2012-01-19
EP2397853A3 (en) 2012-03-14
CA2649688A1 (en) 2007-09-20
EP2441493A1 (en) 2012-04-18
EP2397854A3 (en) 2012-03-14
US20130101523A1 (en) 2013-04-25
EP2253957A1 (en) 2010-11-24
EP2397852B1 (en) 2013-12-04
EP2441493B1 (en) 2014-05-07
EP2428801B1 (en) 2014-05-07
US20090324503A1 (en) 2009-12-31
US9040233B2 (en) 2015-05-26
US20090124549A1 (en) 2009-05-14
US8101192B2 (en) 2012-01-24
EP2397856A3 (en) 2012-03-14
BRPI0708865A2 (en) 2011-06-14
BRPI0708912B1 (en) 2018-03-20
EP2397852A2 (en) 2011-12-21
EP1994409A2 (en) 2008-11-26
US7842299B2 (en) 2010-11-30
WO2007106536A3 (en) 2008-01-10
ZA200808644B (en) 2017-08-30
EP2441470B1 (en) 2014-05-07
EP2441470A1 (en) 2012-04-18
US8440206B2 (en) 2013-05-14
EP2397856B1 (en) 2013-11-13
US20110014224A1 (en) 2011-01-20
EP2397856A2 (en) 2011-12-21
EP2441469A1 (en) 2012-04-18
BRPI0708912A2 (en) 2011-06-14
EP2207035A3 (en) 2010-11-17
EP2253957B1 (en) 2013-05-15
EP2397854B1 (en) 2014-06-04
WO2007106536A2 (en) 2007-09-20
BRPI0708865A8 (en) 2019-01-22
EP2207035A2 (en) 2010-07-14
EP2428801A1 (en) 2012-03-14

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US9040233B2 (en) Methods for detecting a Mycobacterium tuberculosis infection
AU2009294850B2 (en) Methods for detecting a Mycobacterium tuberculosis infection
EP2502076B1 (en) Methods for detecting a mycobacterium tuberculosis infection

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: THE GOVERNMENT OF THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, DB

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:OREGON HEALTH & SCIENCE UNIVERSITY;REEL/FRAME:035551/0181

Effective date: 20080911

Owner name: OREGON HEALTH & SCIENCE UNIVERSITY, OREGON

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:LEWINSOHN, DAVID;LEWINSOHN, DEBORAH;REEL/FRAME:035551/0183

Effective date: 20080714

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION